unfoldingWord_en_tn/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv

378 KiB
Raw Blame History

1BookChapterVerseIDSupportReferenceOrigQuoteOccurrenceGLQuoteOccurrenceNote
22COfrontintrour4j0# Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians\n\n1. Opening and thanksgiving (1:17)\n2. Trouble and boasting (1:814)\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:152:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:152:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:511)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:1213)\n4. Pauls ministry (2:147:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:1417)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:16)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:74:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:718)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:110)\n * The gospel (5:116:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:310)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:117:4)\n5. Paul rejoices about Titus visit to the Corinthians (7:516)\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:19:15)\n * Example of the Macedonians (8:16)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:79:5)\n * Blessing and thanksgiving (9:615)\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:113:10)\n * The true standard for boasting (10:118)\n * Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:115)\n * Paul boasts about his suffering (11:1633)\n * Pauls ascent to heaven and the thorn in the flesh (12:110)\n * Paul concludes his boasting (12:1113)\n * Paul defends his financial conduct (12:1418)\n * Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:1913:10)\n8. Closing (13:1113)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?\n\nPaul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?\n\nIn 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.\n\nPaul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Pauls Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Corinth like?\n\nCorinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.\n\n### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?\n\nThese were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”\n* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)\n* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?\n\nPauls message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?\n* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
32CO1introtsh30# 2 Corinthians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special Concepts<br><br>### Pauls integrity<br><br>People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.<br><br>### Comfort<br><br>Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical question<br><br>Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### We<br><br>Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.<br><br>### Guarantee<br><br>Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christians eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of Gods given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
42CO11epd21General Information:
52CO11mel3Παῦλος…τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ1Paul … to the church of God that is in CorinthYour language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth”
62CO11f59uΤιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς1Timothy our brotherThe word **our** indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew **Timothy** and considered him to be their spiritual **brother**.
72CO11mhg5translate-namesἈχαΐᾳ1Achaia**Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
82CO12f6k1χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη1May grace be to you and peaceThis is a common greeting that Paul uses in his letters.
92CO13px2qfigs-activepassiveεὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1May the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ be praisedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
102CO13k7dlὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ1the God and FatherAlternate translation: “God, who is the Father”
112CO13pg4afigs-parallelismὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως1the Father of mercies and the God of all comfortThese two phrases express the same idea in two different ways. Both phrases refer to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
122CO13blv4ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως1the Father of mercies and the God of all comfortThis could mean: (1) the words **mercies** and **all comfort** describe the character of **Father** and **God**. (2) the words **Father** and **God** refer to one who is the source of **mercies** and **all comfort**.
132CO14n2lcfigs-exclusiveπαρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν1comforts us in all our afflictionHere, **us** and **our** include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
142CO15nn5afigs-metaphorὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς1For just as the sufferings of Christ abound toward usPaul speaks of the **sufferings of Christ** as if they were objects that could increase in number. Alternate translation: “For just as Christ suffered greatly for our sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
152CO15i254τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the sufferings of ChristThis could refer to: (1) the **sufferings** that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ. (2) the **sufferings** that Christ experienced on their behalf.
162CO15tg9wfigs-metaphorπερισσεύει…ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν2our comfort aboundsPaul speaks of **comfort** as if it were an object that could increase in size. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
172CO16y9bifigs-exclusiveεἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα1But if we are afflictedHere the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
182CO16ylw2figs-activepassiveεἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
192CO16wyj4figs-activepassiveεἴτε παρακαλούμεθα1if we are comfortedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
202CO16cfq7τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως, τῆς ἐνεργουμένης1your comfort that resultsAlternate translation: “you experience effective comfort”
212CO18jqn8figs-doublenegativesοὐ…θέλομεν ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν1we do not want you to be uninformedIf your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … uninformed**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
222CO18pr8afigs-metaphorὅτι καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐβαρήθημεν1We were so completely crushed beyond our strengthPaul and Timothy refer to their emotions of despair being like a heavy weight they have to carry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
232CO18gu5bfigs-activepassiveὑπερβολὴν…ἐβαρήθημεν1We were so completely crushedThe word **burdened** refers to the feeling of despair. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We were in complete despair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
242CO19lks3figs-metaphorαὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου ἐσχήκαμεν1we had the sentence of death on usPaul and Timothy are comparing their feeling of despair to that of someone condemned to die. Alternate translation: “we were in despair like someone who is condemned to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
252CO19i7upfigs-ellipsisἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τῷ Θεῷ1but in GodThe words “be putting our trust” are left out of this phrase. Alternate translation: “but instead, be putting our trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
262CO19bu2yfigs-idiomτῷ ἐγείροντι τοὺς νεκρούς1who raises the deadHere to raise is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who causes the dead to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
272CO110x4khfigs-metaphorθανάτου1a deadly perilPaul compares his feeling of despair as a result of the troubles that they experienced to a **deadly peril** or terrible danger. Alternate translation: “despair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
282CO110mwn9καὶ ἔτι ῥύσεται1he will continue to deliver usAlternate translation: “he also will continue to rescue us”
292CO111q17dσυνυπουργούντων καὶ ὑμῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τῇ δεήσει1as you also join together … on our behalfAlternate translation: “God will rescue us from danger as you, the people of the church of Corinth, also help us by praying with us”
302CO111k1flfigs-activepassiveτὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα1the gracious favor given to usIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the gracious favor which God has given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
312CO112kqv3figs-exclusiveἡμῶν…ἡμῶν…ἀνεστράφημεν1General Information:In these verses Paul uses the words **our**, **we**, and **ourselves** to refer to himself and Timothy and possibly others who served with them. These words do not include the people he was writing to. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
322CO112r9p8ἡ γὰρ καύχησις ἡμῶν αὕτη ἐστίν1For our proud confidence is thisThe word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of feeling great satisfaction and joy in something.
332CO112c7mufigs-personificationτὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν1the testimony of our consciencePaul speaks of not being guilty as if his **conscience** were a person that could testify. Alternate translation: “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
342CO112c1bdfigs-metonymyοὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν χάριτι Θεοῦ1not relying on fleshly wisdom but on the grace of God.Here, **fleshly** represents human. Alternate translation: “We have not relied on human wisdom but on the grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
352CO113h21jfigs-doublenegativesοὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ’ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε ἢ καὶ ἐπιγινώσκετε1For we write no other things to you, but that which you read or also understandIf your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **no … but**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “you could read and understand everything we write to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
362CO114ma5mκαύχημα ὑμῶν1your reason for boastingThe word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of feeling great satisfaction and joy in something.
372CO115k1u90Connecting Statement:Paul explains his sincere expectation with pure motives to come see the believers in Corinth after his first letter.
382CO115n5exταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει1with this confidenceThe word **this** refers to Pauls previous comments about the Corinthians.
392CO115y432δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε1you might have a second blessingAlternate translation: “you might benefit from me visiting you twice”
402CO116mp6uὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν1to be sent on my way to Judea by youAlternate translation: “to assist me to continue on to Judea”
412CO117zms7figs-rquestionμήτι ἄρα τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ ἐχρησάμην?1I did not then take it lightly, did I?Paul uses this question to emphasize he was sure about his decision to visit the Corinthians. The expected answer to the question is “no”. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I was not hesitating.” or “I was confident in my decision.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
422CO117chy9figs-rquestionἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?1Do I plan things according to human standards … at the same time?Paul uses this question to emphasize that his plans to visit the Corinthians were sincere. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to human standards, so that I would say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
432CO117fq3tfigs-explicitἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?1This means that Paul did not say both that he would visit and that he would not visit at the same time. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to fleshly planning, so that I say Yes, I will certainly visit and No, I will definitely not visit at the same time!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
442CO117y41zfigs-doubletἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ?1Do I plan things … so that I say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time?The words **yes** and **no** are repeated for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
452CO119z4hefigs-explicitὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ γὰρ Υἱὸς, Ἰησοῦς Χριστός…οὐκ ἐγένετο ναὶ καὶ οὒ, ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν.1For the Son of God … is not “Yes” and “No.” Instead, he is always “Yes.”**Jesus** says “**Yes**” concerning the promises of God, which means that he guarantees that they are true. Alternate translation: “For the Son of God, Jesus Christ … does not say Yes and No concerning Gods promises. Instead, he always says Yes.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
462CO119hd2tguidelines-sonofgodprinciplesὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ…Υἱὸς1the Son of God**Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
472CO120h2xcfigs-explicitὅσαι…ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί1all the promises of God are “Yes” in himThis means that Jesus guarantees all of the **promises of God**. Alternate translation: “all the promises of God are guaranteed in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
482CO120h4uvἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί…δι’ αὐτοῦ1“Yes” in him … through him we sayBoth occurrences of the word **him** refer to Jesus Christ.
492CO121d3s3ὁ δὲ βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς σὺν ὑμῖν εἰς Χριστὸν καὶ χρίσας ἡμᾶς Θεός1Now God is the one who establishes us with youThis could mean: (1) Paul is saying that **God** confirms the relationship of him and his team with each other because they are **in Christ**. (2) Paul is saying that **God** confirms the relationship of him and his team, and the Corinthians, with **Christ**.
502CO121tjc6χρίσας ἡμᾶς1he anointed usThis could mean: (1) he sent us to preach the gospel. (2) he chose us to be his people.
512CO122z43lfigs-metaphorὁ καὶ σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς1the one who also sealed usPaul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a mark on us as a sign that we belong to him. Alternate translation: “he has put his mark of ownership on us” or “he has shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
522CO122xe98figs-metonymyδοὺς τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν1he gave us the pledge of the Spirit in our heartsHere the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Alternate translation: “gave us the Spirit to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
532CO122jcv7figs-metaphorτὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος1the pledge of the SpiritThe **Spirit** is spoken of as if he was a partial downpayment toward eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
542CO123j8lcἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν1Now I call God as a witness to my soulHere, to be **a witness** refers to a person telling what they have seen or heard in order to settle an argument. Alternate translation: “I ask God to show what I say is true”
552CO123j15tὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν1so that I might spare youAlternate translation: “so that I might not cause you more suffering”
562CO124cyu4συνεργοί ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν1we are fellow workers with you for your joyAlternate translation: “we are working with you so that you may have joy”
572CO124cih8figs-idiomτῇ…πίστει ἑστήκατε1you stand firm in the faithHere, **stand firm** can refer to something that does not change. Alternate translation: “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
582CO2introhy3h0# 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:152:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:152:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:511)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:1213)\n4. Pauls ministry (2:147:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:1417)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [2:34](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians. \n\n### “Grieving” others\n\nPaul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:18](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone inside. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside. \n\n### The person who caused grief\n\nIn [2:511](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Pauls authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has properly been disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Aroma and fragrance\n\nIn [2:1416](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and those with him are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just like that, he and those with him spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Pauls use of pronouns\n\nIn [2:113](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:1417](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Pauls travel\n\nIn [2:1213](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:57](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Pauls travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]])
592CO21wh9cgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Connecting Statement:Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [1:23](../01/23.md) about the reason why he did not visit Corinth, which was to “spare” them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I have not come to Corinth:” or “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
602CO21wpd4writing-pronounsἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο τὸ μὴ1Here, the word **this** refers ahead to what Paul is about to say: **not to come to you again in sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit, or you could rephrase the sentence so that you do not use **this**. Alternate translation: “for myself what follows: not” or “for myself not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
612CO21yz5qfigs-idiomἐμαυτῷ1Here the phrase **for myself** indicates that Paul made this choice because of reasons he thought about. In other words, he was not forced to make this choice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that someone made their own choice or decision. Alternate translation: “on my own” or “in my own mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
622CO21yrbkfigs-goτὸ μὴ…ἐλθεῖν1Here the word **come** refers to traveling from somewhere else to Corinth to visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “not to travel” or “not to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
632CO21ma6nfigs-explicitπάλιν1Here, the word **again** implies that Paul has already visited the Corinthians **in sorrow**. He does not give many details about this visit. It cannot be the first time that he visited the Corinthians, so he must have visited them again **in sorrow** sometimes between when he first met them and when he wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second time” or “yet again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
642CO21hu8yfigs-explicitἐν λύπῃ1Here the ones who experience the **sorrow** could be: (1) Paul and the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for all of us” (2) just the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
652CO21ij73figs-abstractnounsἐν λύπῃ1in sorrowIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “in a sorrowful way” or “in a way that makes us sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
662CO22jb50grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul is avoiding the “sorrow” he mentioned in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I decided that because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
672CO22q4aqgrammar-connect-condition-hypotheticalεἰ…ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς1Here Paul refers to a situation that has not happened and which he intends to keep from happening. He refers to the situation using the conditional form to indicate what would result from the situation if it did happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to something that may not happen but that the author wishes to speak about. Alternate translation: “supposing that I myself grieved you” or “were I myself to grieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
682CO22le34figs-rpronounsἐγὼ λυπῶ1Here, the word **myself** emphasizes **I**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **I** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is I myself who grieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])\n\n\n\n
692CO22nb6xfigs-rquestionκαὶ τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ?1If I caused you pain, who could cheer me up but the very one who was hurt by me?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there is no one else.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then there is no one cheering me up, except the one being grieved by me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
702CO22mbbofigs-genericnounτίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος1Here the author uses the singular form **the one** to refer in general to people, particularly to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers in general to people. Alternate translation: “who are those cheering me up, except those being grieved” or “who are those cheering me up, except you who are being grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
712CO22mbaggrammar-connect-exceptionsτίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ1If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this question to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is it not the one being grieved by me who is the only one cheering me up” or “is there any one cheering me up besides the one being grieved by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
722CO22x2vrfigs-activepassiveὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ1the very one who was hurt by meIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I have grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
732CO23kxu2figs-explicitἔγραψα1I wrote this same thingHere Paul refers to a letter he had already written to the Corinthians. Most likely, he wrote this letter sometime between 1 Corinthians and 2 Corinthians, but we do not have the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that Paul is referring to a letter that he already sent to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my last letter” or “I sent you the previous letter that said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
742CO23e7c4writing-pronouns τοῦτο αὐτὸ1Here, the phrase **this same {thing}** refers to what Paul wrote in the previous letter. He could referring to: (1) what he just wrote in [2:12](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “the same thing I am now writing” (2) the contents of the previous letter in general. Alternate translation: “those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
752CO23abtygrammar-connect-time-simultaneousἐλθὼν1Here, the phrase **having come** refers to something that an event that is still in the future for Paul but that would happen at the same as **I might not have sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens at the same time as another event in the future. Alternate translation: “whenever I came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
762CO23l9t0figs-goἐλθὼν1Here, the word **come** refers to Pauls plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to traveling to visit someone. Alternate translation: “having arrived” or “having come to visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
772CO23v87ifigs-abstractnounsμὴ…λύπην σχῶ ἀφ’1I might not be hurt by those who should have made me rejoiceIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “I might not become sorrowful because of” or “I might not be sad because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
782CO23owznἀφ’ ὧν ἔδει με χαίρειν1Here, this clause could indicate that **it is necessary** for: (1) Paul to **rejoice** in the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “from those in which it is necessary for me to rejoice” (2) the Corinthians to give “joy” to Paul. Alternate translation: “from those for whom it is necessary to give me joy”
792CO23p4q2grammar-connect-logic-resultπεποιθὼς1Here, the phrase **having confidence** introduces a reason why Paul **wrote** the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because I had confidence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
802CO23b6f9figs-abstractnounsπεποιθὼς1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “being confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
812CO23i5r6ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν1my joy is the same joy you all haveHere Paul could be stating that his **joy**: (1) leads to the Corinthians joy. Alternate translation: “my joy leads to your joy” (2) has the same source as the Corinthians joy. Alternate translation: “what gives me joy is what gives you joy” (3) comes from the Corinthians joy. Alternate translation: “my joy comes from your joy”
822CO23gmyofigs-abstractnounsἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I am joyful and so you are joyful” or “I rejoice and so you rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
832CO24p4n6grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation about the letter that Paul **wrote** to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
842CO24tl4mfigs-explicitἔγραψα1Here, the phrase **I wrote** again refers to the previous letter. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
852CO24uch7figs-idiomἐκ…ἔγραψα ὑμῖν1from great afflictionHere Paul refers to “writing” **out of** something else. In his culture, this form referred to what the person was experiencing while they **wrote**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to what an author experiences while they are writing something. Alternate translation: “I wrote to you as I experienced” or “I wrote to you while I felt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
862CO24oz8afigs-abstractnounsἐκ…πολλῆς θλίψεως καὶ συνοχῆς καρδίας1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **tribulation** and **anguish**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “suffer” and “distress.” Alternate translation: “as I suffered much and was distressed in my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
872CO24vs7mfigs-metonymyσυνοχῆς καρδίας1with anguish of heartIn Pauls culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “anguish of mind” or “emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
882CO24d5vffigs-idiomδιὰ πολλῶν δακρύων1with many tearsHere, the phrase **through many tears** indicates what Paul was doing while he **wrote** the letter. The word **tears** refers to the act of crying or weeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that a person is crying or weeping while they are doing something. Alternate translation: “with much crying” or “as I shed many tears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
892CO24y0t3figs-infostructureοὐχ ἵνα λυπηθῆτε, ἀλλὰ τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε, ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς1If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “so that you might know the love that I have more abundantly for you, not so that you would be grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
902CO24uc77figs-activepassiveλυπηθῆτε1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, the Paul implies that “he himself” would do it. Alternate translation: “I would grieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
912CO24g826figs-abstractnounsτὴν ἀγάπην…ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “how abundantly I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
922CO24zw13περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς1Here, the phrase **more abundantly** could indicate that: (1) Paul has “abundant” love for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “most abundantly for you” or “very abundantly for you” (2) Paul loves the Corinthians more than he loves other people. Alternate translation: “more abundantly for you than I have for others”
932CO25xommgrammar-connect-logic-contrastδέ1Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul did not want to “grieve” them. Here he addresses how someone has **caused grief**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
942CO25xlxcgrammar-connect-condition-factεἰ…τις λελύπηκεν, οὐκ…λελύπηκεν1Here Paul is speaking as if someone causing **grief** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that someone has indeed **caused grief**. Alternate translation: “the person who caused grief has not grieved only” or “if anyone has caused grief, and it has happened, he has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
952CO25ln83figs-abstractnounsλελύπηκεν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “grieve.” Alternate translation: “has grieved people” or “has caused others to grieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
962CO25j6bnfigs-gendernotationsοὐκ…λελύπηκεν1Here, Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has **grieved** others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
972CO25d7fxfigs-explicitοὐκ ἐμὲ λελύπηκεν1Here Paul could be indicating that the person has: (1) **grieved** Paul some, but mostly the person has **grieved** the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me much” (2) not **grieved** Paul at all but only the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
982CO25rvptfigs-idiomἀπὸ μέρους1Here, the phrase **in part** indicates that only some of an action or group is involved. In this case, Paul could be using **in part** to refer to: (1) how many of the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “some of you” or “part of your group” (2) how much the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “he has partially grieved you” or “you also in part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
992CO25iva7figs-infostructureἀπὸ μέρους, ἵνα μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ πάντας ὑμᾶς1There are several ways to understood how the pieces of the sentence go together. You could translate the sentence so that: (1) **in order that I might not burden all of you** indicates the reason why Paul uses the phrase **in part**, which would refer to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “you in part, which I say so that I might not burden all of you” (2) **in part** and **all of you** go together, and **in order that I might not burden** is a parenthetical statement explaining why Paul says **in part**. Alternate translation: “in part—which I say so that I might not burden—all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1002CO25or46figs-metaphorμὴ ἐπιβαρῶ1Here, to **burden** someone refers to placing a heavy object on someones back. Paul could be using the phrase **I might not burden** to refer to: (1) how he is trying to avoid saying too much about the situation. In other words, Paul uses the phrase **in part** because he does not want to make his words too strong, which would make the words like a person carrying a heaven load. Alternate translation: “I might not say too much about” or “I might not exaggerate about” (2) how he wants to avoid troubling or distressing all of them, which would be like “burdening” them with a heavy object. Alternate translation: “I might not distress” or “I might not trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1012CO26wr3kfigs-abstractnounsτῷ τοιούτῳ ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **punishment**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “punish.” Alternate translation: “How such a person has been punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1022CO26iy4rfigs-extrainfoἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη1This punishment of that person by the majority is enoughHere, the word **This** indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew what the **punishment** was. However, Paul never states exactly what the punishment was. You should use a word or phrase that is as general as what Paul used. Alternate translation: “That punishment” or “The punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1032CO26g3eowriting-pronounsτῷ τοιούτῳ1Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he mentioned in the previous verse, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the person we are talking about” or “on that individual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1042CO26z2dttranslate-unknownτῶν πλειόνων1Here, the word **majority** refers to more than half of a group. Often it means most of the group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Paul is referring to “most” of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “almost all of you” or “the majority of your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1052CO26d7b7figs-extrainfoτῶν πλειόνων1Here the phrase **the majority** implies a “minority.” These are some of the Corinthians who either did not agree with the **punishment** or who thought that the person had done nothing wrong. Paul does not give any information about this “minority,” however, so you should use a word or phrase that refers to most of the people in a group. Alternate translation: “all but a few of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1062CO26a7c4figs-explicitἱκανὸν1is enoughHere, the word **sufficient** could indicate that the **punishment**: (1) has been severe enough. Alternate translation: “is severe enough” or “is sufficiently strong” (2) has lasted long enough. Alternate translation: “has lasted long enough” or “can end now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1072CO27we1igrammar-connect-logic-contrastτοὐναντίον μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς χαρίσασθαι1Here, the words **on the contrary** and **rather** indicate that Paul wishes the Corinthians to do now the opposite of what they were doing. Instead of “punishing” the person, Paul wants them now to **forgive and comfort** the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that naturally indicate such a change in behavior. Alternate translation: “in contrast, you should instead forgive” or “instead of doing that, you should change your behavior and forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1082CO27w4n6figs-gendernotationsπαρακαλέσαι…τῇ1Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “comfort the individual … any” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1092CO27vpx1figs-activepassiveμή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος1he is not overwhelmed by too much sorrowIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that excessive sorrow might not overwhelm such a person” or “so that such a person might not experience overwhelming and excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1102CO27i3dmfigs-metaphorμή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος1Here Paul speaks as if a person could be **overwhelmed** or swallowed up by **sorrow**. He speaks in this way to indicate that a person can experience so much **sorrow** that it controls and destroys them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so that such a person might not be overcome by excessive sorrow” or “so that such a person might not despair because of his excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1112CO27me4ywriting-pronounsὁ τοιοῦτος1Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he has already mentioned, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. See how the translated this phrase in [2:6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “the person we are talking about” or “that individual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1122CO27cgilfigs-abstractnounsτῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “as he is excessively sorrowful” or “because he is excessively sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1132CO28r916grammar-connect-logic-resultδιὸ1Connecting Statement:Here, the word **So** introduces an exhortation that is based on what Paul said in the previous verse about “forgiving” and “comforting” the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1142CO28ii0xfigs-infostructureκυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην1Here, the phrase **for him** could go with: (1) **love**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm the love that you have for him” (2) **reaffirm**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm to him your love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1152CO28yi2zfigs-abstractnounsεἰς…ἀγάπην1publicly affirm your love for himIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “that you love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1162CO28vlmyfigs-gendernotationsαὐτὸν1Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), [7](../02/07.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual” or “the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n
1172CO29oaddgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **Indeed** introduces more information about the letter that Paul wrote to them (see [2:34](../02/03.md)). It does not identify a close link with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **Indeed** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “As a matter of fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1182CO29lc78figs-explicitκαὶ ἔγραψα1Here, the phrase **I also wrote** again refers to the letter that Paul sent to them before he wrote 2 Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:34](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I also wrote that letter” or “I also sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1192CO29pp4jfigs-doubletεἰς τοῦτο…ἵνα1Here, the phrases **for this reason** and **so that** both introduce the purpose for which Paul **wrote** the previous letter. Paul uses this repetition to emphasize his purpose. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, and if it would not emphasize the purpose, you could combine the two phrases and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so that” or “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1202CO29eebjtranslate-unknownτὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν1Here, the word **proof** refers primarily to the results of a test or trial. In this case, Paul is saying that he wants to **know** how they passed the test, which were the commands he included in the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the results of a test. Alternate translation: “how you responded to my commands” or “your character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1212CO29uzsxfigs-possessionτὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **proof** that the Corinthians give or provide. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the prove you provide” or “the proof from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1222CO29gs2tfigs-abstractnounsτὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **proof**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prove.” Alternate translation: “what you would prove to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1232CO29xw5tfigs-explicitὑπήκοοί1you are obedient in everythingHere, Paul does not state to whom they are **obedient**. He could be implying that they are **obedient** to: (1) him as an apostle. Alternate translation: “obedient to me” (2) God and Gods commands. Alternate translation: “obedient to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1242CO210r7ibgrammar-connect-words-phrasesδέ1Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in Pauls argument. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development or a conclusion, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Finally,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1252CO210o14xfigs-explicitᾧ…τι χαρίζεσθε, κἀγώ1Here Paul could be making: (1) a specific statement about forgiving the person who “grieved” the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “to that person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (2) a general concluding statement about forgiveness. Alternate translation: “to any person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1262CO210uzvmfigs-ellipsisκἀγώ1This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “I also forgive it” or “I also forgive them for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1272CO210tzn1grammar-connect-words-phrasesκαὶ γὰρ1Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous clause (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “further,” or “and in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1282CO210d9ahfigs-infostructureκαὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ὃ κεχάρισμαι, εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι, δι’ ὑμᾶς1Here Paul includes the comment **if I have forgiven anything** in the middle of his sentence. Consider what may be a natural place to include extra information like this. Alternate translation: “for indeed, if I have forgiven anything, what I have forgiven is for your sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1292CO210avqvfigs-explicitεἴ τι κεχάρισμαι1This clarification fits with what Paul said in [2:5](../02/05.md) about how the person did not “grieve” him but rather the Corinthians. Much like there, Paul could be saying that: (1) he does not have very much to forgive, since the person only hurt him a little. Alternate translation: “what little I had to forgive” (2) he really has nothing to forgive, since the person hurt the Corinthians, not him. Alternate translation: “although there was nothing to forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1302CO210cbm6δι’ ὑμᾶς1forgiven for your sakeHere, the phrase **for your sake** could mean that: (1) Paul forgives the person to benefit or help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “is for your benefit” (2) Paul forgives the person because the Corinthians forgave him. Alternate translation: “is because of you” or “is because you forgave”
1312CO210b6uyfigs-explicitἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ1Here, the phrase **in {the} presence of Christ** could indicate that: (1) Paul forgives because he knows that **Christ** sees or knows what he does. So, he acts in a way that pleases **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christ desires” or “with Christ watching” (2) Paul forgives with **Christ** as witness. Alternate translation: “with Christ as witness” or “with Christ guaranteeing it” (3) Paul forgives as someone who represents **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as one who represents Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1322CO210nq4nfigs-abstractnounsἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **presence**, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to being close to or in front of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in front of Christ” or “before Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1332CO211xaocgrammar-connect-words-phrasesἵνα1Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and Corinthians should “forgive” others (see [2:10](../02/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1342CO211xoawfigs-activepassiveμὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Satan would not take advantage of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1352CO211x3p2translate-unknownμὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν1Here, the phrase **taken advantage of** refers to when someone gains power or control over someone else, usually by using some area in which that person is weak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how someone gains power or control over someone else. Alternate translation: “we would not be exploited” or “we would not be dominated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1362CO211z6nogrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the first half of verse about **Satan**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “because” or “inasmuch as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1372CO211m46tfigs-litotesοὐ…αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν1For we are not ignorant of his plansHere the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “we are fully aware of his schemes” or “we are very knowledgeable about his schemes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1382CO212nh7ugrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section. Paul has finished speaking about the person that he and the Corinthians should forgive. He now returns to the topic of his travel plans and why he has not visited the Corinthians (see [1:823](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” or “I wish to speak again about my journeys:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1392CO212l6vdfigs-goἐλθὼν…εἰς1Connecting Statement:Here, the phrase **having come to** refers to arriving in one place or city from another, in this case probably traveling on land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “having traveled to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1402CO212c14ogrammar-connect-logic-contrastεἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας…ἀνεῳγμένης1This clause gives information that contrasts with what Paul will say in the previous verse about how he left **Troas**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this contrast with a natural form. Alternate translation: “and although a door for the gospel of Christ had been opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1412CO212a1tifigs-metaphorεἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης1a door for the gospel of Christ was opened to me in the LordHere Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for him to preach the **gospel** as if God were “opening” a **door** for the **Gospel**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul can go in and preach the message about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “and an opportunity to preach the gospel of Christ having been given to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1422CO212n9crfigs-activepassiveεἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. In this case, Paul could be stating the the **Lord** did it, or he could be implying that “God” did it **in {the} Lord**. See the note about **in {the} Lord**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord having opened a door for the gospel of Christ for me” or “and God having opened a door for the Gospel of Christ for me in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1432CO212vtg5figs-possessionτὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that could: (1) be about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel concerning Christ” (2) belong to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “Christs gospel” or “the gospel from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1442CO212fcf7figs-metaphorἐν Κυρίῳ1Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe his union with Christ. In this case, being **in {the} Lord**, or united to the Lord, shows that the **door** was **opened** to Paul: (1) by the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “by the Lord” (2) so that he could continue to serve in his union with the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “in my union with the Lord” or “so that I can do what the Lord wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1452CO212m7x6figs-explicitΚυρίῳ1Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord, the Messiah” (2) God generally. Alternate translation: “the Lord God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1462CO213rjy9figs-idiomοὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου1I had no relief in my spiritHere, the clause **I had no relief in my spirit** indicates that Paul was anxious or concerned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable form or plain language. Alternate translation: “my mind could not rest” or “I was concerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1472CO213k7k9figs-explicitοὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου1Here Paul does not clarify what he was concerned or anxious about. He clarifies later in [7:516](../07/05.md) that he was anxious to know how Titus visit to the Corinthians went. The Corinthians would have made this inference, since Titus had already visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “I had no relief in my spirit about Titus visit to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1482CO213trp2figs-abstractnounsοὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “restful” or “relieved.” Alternate translation: “my spirit was not restful” or “my spirit was not relieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1492CO213w79ifigs-explicitμὴ εὑρεῖν με Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου1Here Paul is stating that **Titus** was not in Troas, not that he simply could not find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that shows that **Titus** was not in the city of Troas when Paul visited there. Alternate translation: “as I found out that my brother Titus was not there” or “as my brother Titus was not in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1502CO213xd5hfigs-metaphorΤίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου1my brother TitusHere Paul speaks of **Titus** as if he were his **brother** (probably a younger **brother**). He speaks in this way to indicate that **Titus** is a fellow believer and that he and Paul are as close as if they they were brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “Titus, who is like my own brother,” or “my very dear friend and fellow believer Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1512CO213wq6jfigs-explicitἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς1So I left themHere Paul refers to how he **said farewell** to the people from Troas, but he also means that he left their city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having said farewell to them and departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1522CO213j9jewriting-pronounsαὐτοῖς1Here, the word **them** refers to the friends that Paul made in the city of “Troas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)). Most likely, these people were fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom **them** refers more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the people from Troas” or “to my friends in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1532CO213gxp2figs-goἐξῆλθον εἰς1Here, the phrase **went on to** refers to travel in which a person leaves one area and goes to another area. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “I departed from there to go to” or “I went from there to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1542CO214s6k3grammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. Paul will not speak again about Titus and his travel plans until [7:5](../07/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1552CO214g39sfigs-idiomτῷ…Θεῷ χάρις1Here, the phrase **thanks {be} to God** is a way to indicate that one is praising God for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a normal way in your language to thank or praise someone for what that person has done. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1562CO214qgokfigs-exclusiveἡμᾶς…ἡμῶν1Here, the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach … us” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1572CO214gpd2figs-metaphorτῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς1God, who in Christ always leads us in triumphHere Paul speaks as if **God** were a leader who had won a victory and set up a parade or **triumphal procession** to celebrate. In this parade, Paul and those with him could be either or both of the following: (1) prisoners who have been conquered and who are put in the parade to illustrate the victory. This is the normal meaning of the word in other places. Alternate translation: “always parading us as his captives” or “always showing that he leads us” (2) soldiers who helped win the victory and who are celebrating. This is not the normal meaning of the word, but it is possible and fits the context well. Alternate translation: “always having us participate in his triumphal parade” or “always helping us to conquer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1582CO214so2kfigs-metaphorἐν τῷ Χριστῷ1Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why or how they are involved in the **triumphal procession**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that union with Christ is the reason or the means for participating in the **procession**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with Christ” or “by means of our union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1592CO214l1nrfigs-exmetaphorτὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ1Through us he spreads the sweet aroma of the knowledge of him everywhereHere Paul speaks as if **the knowledge of him** were an **aroma**, a smell or odor. In this case, the context implies that this is a pleasing or good smell. He speaks in this way to indicate that everyone hears and reacts to the message about Christ, just like everyone smells and reacts to a strong odor. Also, just like a smell fills a whole room, so the good news fills **every place** on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a simile or plain language. Consider using a form that you can continue to use in the following two verse, in which Paul continues the **aroma** metaphor. Alternate translation: “making known through us and in every place the knowledge of him, which is like an good smell” or “powerfully revealing through us the knowledge of him, which is spreading into every place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1602CO214tlqefigs-possessionτὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **aroma** that is **knowledge**. In other words, the possessive indicates what the **aroma** stands for. Then, Paul indicates that this **knowledge** is about **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the aroma, which is knowledge about him” or “the aroma, that is, knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1612CO214ihbwfigs-abstractnounsτῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “that is knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1622CO214lxlcwriting-pronounsαὐτοῦ1Here, the word **him** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “of God” (2) Christ specifically. Alternate translation: “of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1632CO214eq21figs-hyperboleἐν παντὶ τόπῳ1he spreads … everywhereHere Paul speaks as if God used him and those with him to make God known **in every place**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that God uses them to make God known in many places, or in every place that they visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea clearer. Alternate translation: “in every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1642CO215cjjjgrammar-connect-words-phrasesὅτι1Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about “the aroma” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Here is what I mean:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1652CO215yfx6figs-exclusiveἐσμὲν1Here, just as in [2:14](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1662CO215x6nnfigs-exmetaphorΧριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ1we are to God the sweet aroma of ChristHere Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14](../02/14.md)). Here, he identifies himself and those with him as a **fragrance** that comes from **Christ** and which goes toward **God**. By speaking in this way, he shows that **we** are those who represent or declare who Christ is in the presence of God. Just like everyone smells a good smell and knows where it comes from, so everyone notices Paul and those with him and realizes that they represent **Christ** before **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Make sure that your translation fits with the previous and the following verses. Alternate translation: “we are like a good odor that spreads from Christ before God” or “we represent Christ before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1672CO215b1k1figs-possessionΧριστοῦ εὐωδία1the sweet aroma of ChristHere Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **fragrance** could: (1) come or spread from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance from Christ” (2) be presented or offered by **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance that Christ presents” or “a fragrance that Christ offers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1682CO215itc8figs-activepassiveτοῖς σῳζομένοις1those who are savedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1692CO215ze7nfigs-extrainfoτοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις1Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the **perishing**. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1702CO216zraegrammar-connect-logic-contrastοἷς μὲν…οἷς δὲ1Here, the word **indeed** indicates that the author is introducing the first of two parts. The word **but** introduces the second part. The author uses this form to contrast “the ones perishing” and “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “on one hand, to the ones … but on the other hand, to the others” or “to the ones … but to the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1712CO216pv6ofigs-infostructureοἷς μὲν ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον, οἷς δὲ ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν1Here Paul refers to “the ones perishing” before he refers to “the ones being saved,” which is the opposite of the order he used in [2:15](../02/15.md). This was good style in his culture. If reversing the order from [2:15](../02/15.md) would be confusing for your readers, and if it would not be good style, you could reverse the order here to match that in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “to the ones indeed, an aroma from life to life, but to the others, an aroma from death to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1722CO216t3vwwriting-pronounsοἷς-1Here, the phrase **to the ones** refers to “the ones perishing,” and the phrase **to the {others}** refers to “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom these phrases refer. Alternate translation: “to the latter … to the former” or “to the ones perishing … to the ones being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1732CO216dwk6figs-exmetaphorὀσμὴ-1an aromaHere Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:1415](../02/14.md)). He specifically explains what kind of **aroma** he and those with him are. Those who do not believe think that the **aroma** smells bad, while those who do believe think that the **aroma** smells good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the “smelling” language in [2:1415](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “we smell like an aroma … we smell like an aroma” or “our message is … our message is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
1742CO216ud2ufigs-idiomἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον…ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν1an aroma from death to deathHere Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word. He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the **aroma**, and **to** indicates the effects of the **aroma**. Alternate translation: “that smells like death and leads to death … that smells like life and leads to life” or “of death causing death … of life causing life” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the **aroma** is characterized completely by either **death** or **life**. Alternate translation: “of death … of life” or “characterized completely by death … characterized completely by life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1752CO216yau5figs-abstractnounsἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον…ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live” or adjectives such as “dead” and “alive.” Make sure your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “that comes from something dying and that leads to people dying … that comes from something living and leads to people living” or “that smells like something dead … that smells like something alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1762CO216cdr3writing-pronounsπρὸς ταῦτα1a fragrance from life to lifeHere, the phrase **these {things}** refers back to what those who proclaim the good news must do, things that Paul has outlined in [2:1416](../02/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **these {things}** refers to. Alternate translation: “to do what I have said” or “to preach the gospel like this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1772CO216be6xfigs-rquestionπρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός?1who is worthy of these things?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (2) Paul and those with him are **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1782CO217h7y1grammar-connect-logic-resultγάρ1Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a basis or proof for why he and those with him are not “sufficient,” as the previous question implied (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “You can tell that we are not sufficient because” (2) an answer to the previous question that indicates that Paul and those with him are “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1792CO217pmpzfigs-exclusiveἐσμεν…λαλοῦμεν1Here, just as in [2:1415](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are … we speak” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … I speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1802CO217a5safigs-metonymyτὸν λόγον1who sell the word of GodHere, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1812CO217u7uifigs-nominaladjοἱ πολλοὶ1Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1822CO217yf8utranslate-unknownκαπηλεύοντες1Here, the word **peddling** refers to the practice of selling goods that one has. The word implies that the person who is **peddling** is trying to make as much profit as they can, both by honest and deceitful means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to selling something for as much money as possible. Alternate translation: “trading in” or “selling off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1832CO217ohh8figs-possessionτὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the word** that could be: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1842CO217u4iygrammar-connect-logic-contrastἀλλ’ ὡς-1Here Paul uses **but as** to introduce a contrast with **the many** who “peddle” Gods word. Paul repeats **but as** to continue and emphasize this contrast, not to contrast **sincerity** and **from God**. If the repetition of **but as** would be confusing, you could use **but as** once and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but instead as … and even more as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1852CO217x86yfigs-abstractnounsἐξ εἰλικρινείας1sincerityIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sincerity**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “those who are sincere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1862CO217f9x4figs-explicitὡς ἐκ Θεοῦ1Here, the phrase **as from God** indicates that God sent Paul and those with him to **speak** the gospel. The word **as** indicates how they **speak**. It does not mean that they are not really **from God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as those whom God has sent” or “as ones sent by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1872CO217aizgfigs-explicitλαλοῦμεν1Here, Paul implies that they are speaking **the word of God** that he already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they **speak** more explicit. Alternate translation: “we speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1882CO217vpdcfigs-explicitκατέναντι Θεοῦ1Here, the phrase **in {the} presence of God** could indicate that: (1) they **speak** as they do because they know that **God** sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases **God**. Alternate translation: “as God desires” or “with God watching” (2) they **speak** with **God** as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” or “with God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1892CO217q4dcfigs-abstractnounsκατέναντι Θεοῦ1before GodIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **presence**, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to being close to or in front of **God**. Alternate translation: “in front of God” or “before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1902CO217u2zbfigs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ1we speak in ChristPaul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains how they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that they **speak** as those who are united to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as those united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1912CO31mdwxfigs-exclusiveἀρχόμεθα…ἑαυτοὺς…μὴ χρῄζομεν1Here, just as in [2:1415](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “Are we who preach beginning … ourselves … we do not need … do we” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “Am I beginning … myself … I do not need … do I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1922CO3introf7rh0# 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Pauls ministry (2:147:4)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:16)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:74:6)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Letters of recommendation\n\nIn [3:13](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write down that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])\n\n### Letter and Spirit\n\nIn [3:68](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to the letters in the alphabet, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Pauls point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. \n\n### Glory\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider what term will express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])\n\n### Veiling of the glory on Moses face\n\nIn [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:2935](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation\n\nIn [3:23](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians as a letter of recommendation for him and those with him. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. \n\n### The “veil”\n\nAfter he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:1418](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the Israelites could not see the glory on Moses face, so anyone who hears the Old Testament without believing in Jesus cannot fully understand it. However, Paul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect Gods glory even more than Moses did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The Lord is the Spirit”\n\nIn [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities.
1932CO31um8xfigs-rquestionἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν?1Are we beginning to praise ourselves again?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not beginning to commend ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1942CO31ogwatranslate-unknownἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν1Here, phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. Alternate translation: “to speak favorably of ourselves” or “to vouch for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1952CO31fudsfigs-explicitπάλιν1Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1962CO31noizgrammar-connect-logic-contrast1The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he implied that they were not “commending” themselves again. With **Or**, then, Paul asks a question that introduces the incorrect alternative: they might need **letters of recommendation**. He introduces this incorrect alternate to show that the implication of his first question is true: they are not “commending” themselves again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “Quite the contrary:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1972CO31y8ycfigs-rquestionἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν?1We do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people, do we?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “we do not need them.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “In fact, we certainly do not need, like some, letters of recommendation to you or from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1982CO31synywriting-pronounsὥς τινες1Here, the word **some** refers generally to other people besides Paul and those with him. Paul may more specifically have in mind the people who opposed him in Corinth, but he does not make this explicit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to other people besides Paul and those who serve with him. Alternate translation: “like some others” or “like some people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1992CO31ad1ufigs-possessionσυστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν1letters of recommendationHere Paul uses the possessive form to refer to **letters** that gave a **recommendation** for the person who had the letter. Many people in Pauls culture would ask friends to write these letters, and then they would show the letters to people they visited to prove that they were trustworthy and could be welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally refers to this kind of letter. Alternate translation: “reference letters” or “letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2002CO31dygqfigs-abstractnounsσυστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **recommendation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “recommend.” Alternate translation: “letters that recommend us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2012CO32ty59figs-metaphorἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων1You yourselves are our letter of recommendationHere Paul continues to speak about “letters,” but now he tells the Corinthians that they are the **letter** of recommendation for Paul and those with him. This **letter** is not a physical document, but is **written** in their **hearts**, and **all men** can **read** it. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the recommendation he relies on is the Corinthian believers. In other words, the fact that they believe and that they are close with Paul (**in our hearts**) shows that Paul is trustworthy and a true apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation, which you wrote on us and that is known and read by all men” or “We do not need a letter of recommendation because you yourselves are the recommendation that is in our hearts and that is known and understood by all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2022CO32f8s8figs-rpronounsὑμεῖς ἐστε1Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **You**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **You** in your language. Alternate translation: “You indeed are” or “It is you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2032CO32a7xlfigs-exclusiveἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν…ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν1Here, just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the word **our** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “the letter for us who preach the gospel … our hearts” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “my letter … my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2042CO32ygx8figs-possessionἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν…ἐνγεγραμμένη1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **letter** that could: (1) recommend “us.” Alternate translation: “the letter for us written” or “a letter that recommends us written” (2) be written by “us.” Alternate translation: “a letter written by us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2052CO32v2e7figs-metonymyἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν1written on our heartsIn the Pauls culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that the recommendation from the Corinthians is not written down on paper but is rather part of their relationship with Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “written inside us” or “expressed by our relationship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2062CO32ko7wfigs-activepassiveἐνγεγραμμένη1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states in the following verse that “Christ” did it (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). Alternate translation: “that Christ has written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2072CO32bu1ufigs-activepassiveγινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων1written on our heartsIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which all men know and read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2082CO32pzpzfigs-doubletγινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη1Here, the words **known** and **read** express very similar ideas. It is likely that **known** indicates that people are aware that there is a **letter**, while **read** indicates that they know what the **letter** says. If you do not have words that express these distinctions, and if the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “read” or “noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2092CO32dr5kfigs-gendernotationsπάντων ἀνθρώπων1known and read by all peopleAlthough the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “every person” or “all men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2102CO33s717figs-explicitφανερούμενοι1you are a letter from ChristHere, the phrase **making known** could: (1) indicate that something is well-known or obvious to people. Alternate translation: “being clear” or “so it is evident” (2) state that the Corinthians show or reveal something to others. Alternate translation: “you making it clear” or “you revealing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2112CO33aylwfigs-metaphorἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ, διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν, ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις1Here Paul continues to speak as if the Corinthians were a **letter**. Here, he states that this **letter** was written by **Christ** and **administered** by Paul and those with him. What he means by this is that **Christ** is the one who enabled the Corinthians to believe, and he worked through Paul and those with him to do that. Paul then contrasts a **letter** written with **ink** and on **tablets of stone** with a **letter** written by the power of the **Spirit** and on **hearts of flesh**. What he means by this is that the letter is the Corinthians, not some written document, and that the message is communicated by the **Spirit**, not by letters written with **ink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “you are like a letter of Christ having been administered by us, not written with ink but as if with the Spirit of the living God, not on tablets of stone but as if on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “you are a message from Christ having been administered by us, not communicated by ink but by the Spirit of the living God, not presented on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2122CO33hlapfigs-possessionἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **letter** is from or written by **Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “a letter from Christ” or “a letter written by Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2132CO33wrk4figs-activepassiveδιακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν1cared for by usIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we have administered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2142CO33dsxatranslate-unknownδιακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν1Here, the phrase **having been administered by us** could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped **Christ** compose the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2152CO33bfslfigs-exclusiveἡμῶν1Here, just as in [3:12](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2162CO33akc6figs-infostructureἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις1If your language would not put the negative statements before the positive statements, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “written with the Spirit of the living God, not with ink, on tablets of hearts of flesh, not on tablets of stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2172CO33vyuhfigs-ellipsisἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις1These phrases leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2182CO33q96qfigs-activepassiveἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ1It was written not with ink … on tablets of human heartsIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “Christ” did it. Alternate translation: “which Christ wrote not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2192CO33qt5gtranslate-unknownμέλανι1It was written not with ink but by the Spirit of the living GodHere, the word **ink** refers to liquid that people in Pauls culture used to write letters and words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever term naturally refers to what people use to write letters and words. Alternate translation: “with a pen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2202CO33t5ahfigs-idiomΘεοῦ ζῶντος1not on tablets of stone, but on tablets of human heartsHere, the phrase **living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n
2212CO33ana2translate-unknownἐν πλαξὶν-1Here, the word **tablets** refers to thin, flat pieces of stone on which people would write words, especially important words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what people use to write something important on. Paul may be referring here to the **tablets** on which Moses wrote Gods commandments (see [Exodus 34:14](../exo/34/01.md)), so if possible use a word that could refer to those **tablets**. Alternate translation: “on flat pieces … on flat pieces” or “on plaques … on plaques” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2222CO33ih89figs-possessionπλαξὶν λιθίναις1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that are made out of **stone**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “stone tablets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2232CO33u959figs-possessionπλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις1tablets of human heartsHere Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that refer to **hearts** that are made of **flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “tablets that are fleshly hearts” or “tablets that are hearts made of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2242CO33no25figs-metonymyκαρδίαις σαρκίναις1In the Pauls culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. Here Paul states that these **hearts** are made of **flesh**, which means that they are alive and can function. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of living people” or “of what we think and do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2252CO34pyevgrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in the argument. Here it indicates that Paul is moving on to a slightly different topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces a development in the argument, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2262CO34wy6efigs-exclusiveἔχομεν1Here, just as in [3:13](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel have” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2272CO34z7qxfigs-abstractnounsπεποίθησιν…τοιαύτην ἔχομεν1such confidenceIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “we are confident in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2282CO34q0krwriting-pronounsπεποίθησιν…τοιαύτην1Here, the word **such** indicates that the **confidence** is the kind that Paul showed in the previous verses, especially in [3:13](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that **such** refers back to what Paul has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “that kind of confidence” or “confidence in those ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2292CO34y72kfigs-explicitπρὸς τὸν Θεόν1Here, the phrase **toward God** could indicate that the **confidence** is: (1) before or in the presence of **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God approves of him and those with him. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2302CO35knf2grammar-connect-logic-contrastοὐχ1Here, the word **Not** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about **confidence** (see [3:4](../03/04.md)). He wishes to clarify that the **confidence** is not based on themselves but on **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But it is not” or “However, it is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2312CO35i7ntfigs-exclusiveἑαυτῶν…ἐσμεν…ἑαυτῶν…ἡμῶν1Here, just as in [3:14](../03/01.md), the words **we**, **ourselves**, and **our** do not include the Corinthians. They could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel are … ourselves … ourselves … our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … myself … myself … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2322CO35qye9figs-explicitἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί…ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν1competent in ourselvesHere Paul does not state what they are not **sufficient** to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient from ourselves to preach the gospel … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2332CO35e5e7ἑαυτῶν…λογίσασθαί1to consider anything as coming from usHere, the phrase **to consider** introduces an explanation or elaboration of what **sufficient from ourselves** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or elaboration. Alternate translation: “ourselves, that is, we do not consider” or “ourselves, so that we consider”
2342CO35tws9figs-explicitτι1Here, the word **anything** refers to whatever they do to serve God well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “anything we do preach the gospel” or “whatever we do well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2352CO35wi1tfigs-abstractnounsἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ1our competence is from GodIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sufficiency**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “God makes us sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2362CO36t785figs-exclusiveἡμᾶς διακόνους1Here, just as in [3:15](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel … as servants” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … as a servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2372CO36r5eafigs-possessionδιακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης1Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and those with him as **servants** who “serve” for the benefit of **a new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2382CO36j8rdfigs-infostructureοὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος1If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit, not of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2392CO36poyqfigs-explicitοὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος1When Paul contrasts **letter** and **Spirit**, he implies that **letter** describes the old covenant and **Spirit** describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy **Spirit**, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless, but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2402CO36dp6ifigs-metonymyγράμματος…τὸ…γράμμα1a new covenant, not of the letterHere, the word **letter** refers generally to a message written in “letters.” More specifically, Paul uses the word **letter** to refer to the old covenant, which was written down only and could not change people like the **Spirit** can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a message written in “letters”. Alternate translation: “in written form … what was written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2412CO36bdrzfigs-possessionγράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος1Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **covenant** that is given or mediated by the **Spirit**, not by the **letter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in letters but by the Spirit” or “mediated by letter but by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2422CO36tc4ufigs-explicitΠνεύματος…τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα1but of the SpiritHere, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of Gods Spirit … but Gods Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit … but the spirit” or “of the heart … but the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2432CO36q4atfigs-personificationτὸ…γράμμα ἀποκτέννει1the letter killsHere Paul speaks as if **the letter** were a person who **kills** others. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the letter** (which refers to the old covenant and its regulations) does not have the power to give life but instead can only condemn people to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “the letter is like someone who kills” or “the letter dooms people to die” or “the letter causes death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2442CO37lyf7grammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Connecting Statement:Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2452CO37yzhqgrammar-connect-condition-factεἰ1Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry** of **death** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2462CO37rifefigs-possessionἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that leads to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2472CO37du65figs-explicitἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου1the ministry that produced deathHere, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Moses “administered” the old covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of this death” or “the act of ministering that led to death” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the old covenant or its laws. Alternate translation: “the system of this death” or “the laws that led to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2482CO37ut6rfigs-abstractnounsἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου1Now if the ministry that produced death … came in such gloryIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “administer” and “die.” Alternate translation: “the old covenant, which was administered in a way that causes people die” or “what was administered, which caused people to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2492CO37j1hpfigs-activepassiveἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις1engraved in letters on stonesIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see also [Exodus 34:1](../exo/34/01.md)). Alternate translation: “which God engraved in letters on stones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2502CO37rx13figs-explicitἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις1Here Paul refers to how God **engraved** or carved the regulations for the **ministry** on **stones** or tablets. Much like in the previous verse, **letters** refers to the alphabet, so the point is that God used writing. Paul is probably referring to the story about how Moses met God on a mountain, and God carved the regulations of the covenant on two pieces of stone. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:128](../exo/34/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “engraved in writing by God onto two stone slabs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2512CO37r5p5figs-abstractnounsἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ1in such gloryIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “was very great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2522CO37mymsfigs-explicitὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον Μωϋσέως, διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην1Here Paul refers to a story about what happened after God **engraved** the stone tablets. When Moses returned to talk to the Israelites, his face shone brightly because he had been talking to God. In other words, some of Gods **glory** became part of Moses **face**, and the Israelites could not **look intently** at his face because it was a little like looking at God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:2935](../exo/34/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or include a footnote explaining the story. Alternate translation: “so that the sons of Israel were not able to look carefully at the face of Moses because of the fading glory on his face that came from talking with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2532CO37s9zpfigs-gendernotationsτοὺς υἱοὺς1Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2542CO37mh54translate-kinshipτοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ1Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
2552CO37enwtδιὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην1Here, the reason why the Israelites **were not able to look intently** at Moses face could be that: (1) Moses face was very “glorious.” Alternate translation: “because of the glory of his face, even though it was fading” (2) the **glory of his face** was **fading**. Alternate translation: “because the glory of his face was fading”
2562CO37pqbifigs-abstractnounsτὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “how his face was shining, even though that was fading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2572CO37ewkrfigs-explicitτὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην1Here, the word **fading** could describe: (1) the **glory** of Moses **face**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face that faded” (2) the **ministry of {this} death**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face, although that ministry was fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2582CO38xxn6figs-rquestionπῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ?1Will the ministry of the Spirit not be with much more glory?Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, it has much more glory.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “then the ministry of the Spirit will certainly be with much more glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2592CO38wkvlfigs-pastforfutureοὐχὶ…ἔσται1Here Paul could use the future tense because: (1) he is stating an inference from something in the past, so the inference is future. Paul does not mean that the **ministry** will only have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “then is … not” (2) he is stating that the **ministry** will have **glory** in the future. He could mean that it only has **glory** in the future, or he could mean that it has **glory** in the present and will also have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “will … in the future not be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2602CO38wq1vfigs-possessionἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος1the ministry of the SpiritHere Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ministry** that could: (1) lead to people receiving the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry that provides the Spirit” or “the ministry that leads to the Spirit” (2) be accomplished by the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry worked by the Spirit” or “the ministry accomplished by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2612CO38dhs5figs-explicitἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος1Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Paul and those with him “administered” the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2622CO38o30nfigs-abstractnounsἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “administer.” See how you translated this word in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “the new covenant, which was administered in a way that brought the Spirit,” or “what was administered, which gave the Spirit,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2632CO38bmmefigs-explicitτοῦ Πνεύματος1Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of Gods Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2642CO38tcp5figs-abstractnounsμᾶλλον…ἐν δόξῃ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2652CO39m2cigrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two “ministries” in [3:78](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2662CO39p7p5grammar-connect-condition-factεἰ1Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry of {this} condemnation** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2672CO39ufq6figs-explicitτῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως…ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης1the ministry of righteousnessHere, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how people “administered” the the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2682CO39k779figs-possessionτῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως1the ministry of condemnationHere Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **condemnation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this condemnation” or “the ministry that ended in this condemnation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2692CO39tcxwfigs-abstractnounsτῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως, δόξα1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry**, **condemnation**, and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the old covenant, which was administered in a way that caused people to be condemned, was great,” or “what was administered that led to people being condemned was glorious,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2702CO39if33figs-exclamationsπολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ1how much more does the ministry of righteousness abound in glory!Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two “ministries.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two “ministries.” Alternate translation: “then certainly much more the ministry of this righteousness abounds in glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2712CO39egmyfigs-possessionἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2722CO39e5zzfigs-abstractnounsπολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ.1the ministry of righteousness abound in gloryIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry**, **righteousness**, and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the new covenant, which is administered in a way that makes people righteous, is even more great,” or “what is administered that leads to people being righteous is even more glorious,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2732CO310q8bggrammar-connect-words-phrasesκαὶ γὰρ1Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:79](../03/07.md) (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2742CO310n4pefigs-explicitτὸ δεδοξασμένον…τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης1that which was once made glorious is no longer glorious … because of the glory that exceeds itHere, the phrase **{what} had been glorified** refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase **surpassing glory** refers to the new covenant that Paul and those with him serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2752CO310t2dqfigs-activepassiveοὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον1that which was once made gloriousIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “glorifying,” since Paul is focusing on the fact of “glory” rather than on the action of becoming “glorious.” Alternate translation: “what had glory does not have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2762CO310hmcufigs-infostructureοὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει1Here, the phrase **in this part** could modify: (1) in what way the old covenant is **not glorified**. In other words, **in this part** introduces the way in which something that has **been glorified** can actually be **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “what had been glorified is not glorified, and here is why:” or “what had been glorified is not glorified in this way” (2) **{what} had been glorified**. In other words, the old covenant was **glorified** only “partially.” Alternate translation: “what had been glorified in part is not glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2772CO310es4cfigs-idiomἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει1Here, the phrase **in this part** indicates that a statement is only true in **part** or in some specific way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the qualification that some statement or action is partially true or accurate. Alternate translation: “in a sense” or “in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2782CO310d7k5figs-doubletἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει εἵνεκεν1in this respectHere, the phrase **in this part** and the word **because** both introduce how or why **{what} had been glorified** is **not glorified**. Paul uses both elements because he wants to make his point very clear. If the repetition would not make the point clearer, and if using both elements would be confusing in your language, you could use one word or phrase that introduces how what was **glorified** is **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “because of” or “in comparison to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2792CO310pvbxfigs-abstractnounsτῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “what was much more glorious” or “what was even greater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2802CO310f2moτῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης1Alternate translation: “the glory that surpasses it”
2812CO311grwlgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of the comparison between the two covenants and their **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2822CO311r7c9grammar-connect-condition-factεἰ1Paul is speaking as if the **glory** of **{what} is fading away** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2832CO311ym37τὸ καταργούμενον1Here, the words translated **{what} is fading away** could indicate: (1) that something is disappearing or temporary without stating that anyone is making it disappear. Alternate translation: “what is passing away” (2) that God is causing something to disappear or pass away. Alternate translation: “what is being abolished” or “what God is abolishing”
2842CO311zwb2figs-metaphorτὸ καταργούμενον1that which was fading awayHere, the phrase **fading away** translates the same word that Paul used in [3:7](../03/07.md) to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses face. Paul means that, just like the glory on Moses face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was temporary. See how you translated this idea in [3:7](../03/07.md) and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses face,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2852CO311hm9dfigs-explicitτὸ καταργούμενον…τὸ μένον1Here, the phrase **{what} is fading away** refers to the old covenant, while the phrase **{what} remains** refers to the new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what these phrases refer to. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that is fading away … the new covenant that remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2862CO311wthtfigs-abstractnounsδιὰ δόξης…ἐν δόξῃ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2872CO311wrf4figs-exclamationsπολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ1Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two covenants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly much more what remains will come with glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2882CO312tnc1grammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Since we have such a hopeHere, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he has said about the ministry of “glory” in [3:411](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Because of this ministry of glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2892CO312ib35grammar-connect-logic-resultἔχοντες1Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **act with much boldness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2902CO312j76kfigs-abstractnounsἔχοντες…τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2912CO312u5qawriting-pronounsτοιαύτην ἐλπίδα1such a hopeHere, the word **such** refers to back to what Paul has said about the “glory” of the ministry in [3:711](../03/07.md). In other words, the **hope** is based on the glorious ministry and covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **such** refers to. Alternate translation: “that kind of hope” or “hope in such a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2922CO312rf9hfigs-exclusiveχρώμεθα1Here, just as in [3:16](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2932CO312zbfffigs-explicitχρώμεθα1Here Paul does not exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:711](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2942CO312b5qlfigs-abstractnounsπολλῇ παρρησίᾳ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2952CO313fb59figs-explicitκαὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς1Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show Gods glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal Gods glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrasts more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2962CO313p1y3figs-explicitΜωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου1Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:2935](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses face shone with Gods glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, disappeared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2972CO313bouifigs-gendernotationsτοὺς υἱοὺς1Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2982CO313pdnktranslate-kinshipτοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ1Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
2992CO313vuykfigs-explicitτὸ τέλος1Here, the word **end** could refer to: (1) the result of the **fading**, which was that the “glory” completely stopped shining from Moses face. Alternate translation: “the cessation” or “the termination” (2) the purpose or implication of how the “glory” ceased shining from Moses face, which was that the old covenant too would cease. Alternate translation: “the result” or “the meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3002CO313p5u2figs-explicitτοῦ καταργουμένου1the end of that which was fading awayHere, the phrase **{what} was fading away** could refer to: (1) the “glory” that shone from the **face** of Moses. In this case, Paul could also be implying that the old covenant would also “fade.” Alternate translation: “of the glory that was fading from his face” (2) the old covenant, that would “fade away” when God instituted a new covenant. Alternate translation: “of the covenant that would fade away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3012CO313mczgfigs-possessionτὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **{what} was fading away** completely ceased or “ended.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3022CO313fe5rfigs-abstractnounsτὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **end**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “end” or “cease.” Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” or “what ceased after fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3032CO314kb8ygrammar-connect-logic-contrastἀλλὰ1Here, the word **But** could introduce a contrast between: (1) being able to “look intently” and having **hardened** minds. Alternate translation: “But instead of looking intently,” (2) what Moses did (veiling his face) and what the Israelites did (have **hardened** minds). Alternate translation: “In contrast to Moses,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3042CO314csl1writing-pronounsτὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν1Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3052CO314khkqfigs-activepassiveἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3062CO314zvf5figs-metaphorἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν1But their minds were hardenedHere Paul speaks as if peoples **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that changes when something hits it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3072CO314tzbdgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3082CO314zm7jfigs-idiomἄχρι…τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας1For until this present dayHere, the phrase **until the present day** refers to all the time before and including the **present day**, which is the time when Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time that includes the past and the present. Alternate translation: “up to the present” or “in the past and in the present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3092CO314w68pfigs-metaphorτὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον1when they read the old covenant, that same veil remainsHere Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3102CO314wcbvfigs-infostructureτὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον1Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
3112CO314wymgfigs-explicitτὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα1Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3122CO314gg2dfigs-possessionἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης1when they read the old covenantHere Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person **reading** the **old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3132CO314orvofigs-metonymyτῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης1Here, the phrase **old covenant** refers to the words that contain or describe **the old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3142CO314gl8lfigs-activepassiveμὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον1It has not been removed, because only in Christ is it taken awayIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, Paul implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not lifting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3152CO314vygfgrammar-connect-logic-resultὅτι1Here, the word **because** could indicate why: (1) the **veil** is not “lifted.” Alternate translation: “and it is not lifted because” (2) the **veil remains**. Alternate translation: “and the veil remains because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3162CO314m7lkfigs-metaphorἐν Χριστῷ1Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why and how the **veil** is “lifted.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ leads to the “lifting” of the **veil**. Alternate translation: “only when a person is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3172CO314r1ltfigs-explicitκαταργεῖται1Here, the phrase **fading away** is the same phrase that Paul used to describe how the “glory” was “fading” from Moses face (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). What Paul means is that the **veil** disappears or is removed **in Christ**. If possible, use a word or phrase that reminds your readers of how you translated “fading” in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “is it being abolished” or “is it disappearing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3182CO314rhidwriting-pronounsκαταργεῖται1Here, the word **it** could refer to: (1) the **veil**. Alternate translation: “is this veil fading away” (2) the **old covenant**. Alternate translation: “is this covenant fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3192CO315cv2jgrammar-connect-logic-contrastἀλλ’1Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about the veil “fading away” in Christ ([3:14](../03/14.md)). What Paul says in the rest of the verse repeats many of the ideas from the first parts of [3:14](../03/14.md). Consider whether a contrast word or a connecting word expresses the idea most clearly. Alternate translation: “However,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3202CO315rjh5figs-idiomἕως σήμερον1But even todayHere the phrase **until today** refers to all the time before and including the present day, which is the time when Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time that includes the past and the present. See how you translated the similar phrase “until the present day” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “up to the present” or “in the past and in the present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3212CO315t3dlfigs-metonymyἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς1whenever Moses is readHere, the word **Moses** could refer to: (1) the first five books of the Old Testament, often called “the Law” or the “Pentateuch.” Alternate translation: “the Law is read” or “the first parts of the Old Testament are read” (2) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are read” or “the Old Testament is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3222CO315ip29figs-activepassiveἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone reads Moses” or “they hear someone read Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3232CO315bb5ufigs-metaphorκάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται1Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is like a veil that lies over their heart” or “they do not understand, as if a veil lies over their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3242CO315gwp9figs-metonymyἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν1a veil lies over their heartIn Pauls culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “over their mind” or “over their understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3252CO315z5zhgrammar-collectivenounsτὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν1Here the author is speaking of “hearts” in general, not of one particular **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “their hearts” or “each of their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
3262CO315lmu6writing-pronounsτὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν1Here, the word **their** could refer to: (1) anyone who hears the reading of **Moses** without being “in Christ.” Alternate translation: “the hearts of those who listen” (2) the same people that “their” referred to in [3:14](../03/14.md): the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3272CO316k2drfigs-metaphorἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον1whenever a person turns to the LordHere, the phrase **turn to {the} Lord** refers to a how people stop doing whatever they want and instead begin to trust and obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “one begins to serve the Lord” or “one begins to believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3282CO316aqnawriting-pronounsἐπιστρέψῃ1Here, the word **one** refers to any person who does the “turning.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “anyone might turn” or “any person might turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3292CO316wawhfigs-explicitΚύριον1Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God the Lord” (2) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3302CO316mibmfigs-metaphorπεριαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα1Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:1415](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil was taken away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3312CO316w1y2figs-activepassiveπεριαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα1the veil is taken awayIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the veil disappears” or “God takes away the veil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3322CO317lrxygrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3332CO317ulmpfigs-explicitὁ…Κύριος…Κυρίου1Here, just as in [3:16](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same you did in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3342CO317erpifigs-explicitτὸ Πνεῦμά…τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου1Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “Gods Spirit … that Spirit of the Lord is” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “the spirit … the spirit of the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3352CO317f2o7ὁ…Κύριος τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν1Here Paul could mean that: (1) the “Lord” mentioned in [3:16](../03/16.md) is the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of whom I speak is the Holy Spirit” (2) believers encounter God the **Lord** as the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord is experienced as the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Lord** is “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “the Lord is a spirit”
3362CO317sp81figs-metaphorοὗ…τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου, ἐλευθερία1Here Paul speaks of the **Spirit** being in a place, and so **freedom** also is in that place. Here speaks in this way to connect the **Spirit** and **freedom**. He means that whoever has the **Spirit** also has **freedom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever has the Spirit of the Lord also has freedom” or “the Spirit of the Lord gives freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3372CO317b016figs-possessionτὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** as belonging to or part of the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit who is the Lord is” or “the Spirit who belongs to the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3382CO317uossfigs-abstractnounsἐλευθερία1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “people are free” or “you are free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3392CO317ao12figs-explicitἐλευθερία1Here Paul does not give any details about what people experience **freedom** from or for. If possible, you also should not make these ideas explicit. However, if you must express more information about the **freedom**, it could be **freedom** (1) from the veil. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the veil” (2) from the condemnation of the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from condemnation” (3) from the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the old covenant” (4) to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “there is freedom to proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3402CO318r6rxgrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Now we allHere, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous section. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about Moses and the veil in [3:1217](../03/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “Finally,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3412CO318l3xwfigs-metaphorἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι1with unveiled faces, see as a reflection the glory of the LordHere the author speaks as if believers do not have a “veil” over their “faces” and can thus “reflect” Gods **glory**. Since the veiling language is an important part of what Paul is saying, you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea by using a simile. Paul is indicating a contrast that could be: (1) with Moses, who had to veil the glory on his face. Unlike him, believers do not need to veil their faces. Alternate translation: “revealing the glory of the Lord like those who have unveiled faces” (2) the Israelites, who could not look directly at the glory of God. Unlike them, believers can see Gods glory directly without a “veil.” Alternate translation: “seeing the glory of the Lord, unlike those who could only see a veil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3422CO318ui8ytranslate-unknownκατοπτριζόμενοι1Here, the word translated **reflecting** could refer to: (1) acting as a mirror that “reflects” an image. Alternate translation: “mirroring” (2) seeing something that is “reflected” in a mirror. Alternate translation: “seeing in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3432CO318mdu9figs-abstractnounsτὴν δόξαν Κυρίου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “how great the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3442CO318brpufigs-explicitΚυρίου1Here, just as in [3:1617](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “of God the Lord” or “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3452CO318rc9xfigs-activepassiveμεταμορφούμεθα1are being transformed into the same imageIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “are those whom God is transforming into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3462CO318cq3ifigs-explicitτὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα1Here, the phrase **the same image** refers to the **image** that belongs to the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into his image” or “the that image” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3472CO318g0kufigs-abstractnounsτὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα…ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **image** and **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” and an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “people who reflect the Lord from what is glorious to what is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3482CO318bx5bfigs-idiomἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν1from glory to gloryHere Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word, much like he did in [2:16](../02/16.md). He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the transformation, and **to** indicates the effects of the transformation. Alternate translation: “by someone who has glory so that we also have glory” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the transformation is characterized completely by **glory**. Alternate translation: “with great glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3492CO318mw3vκαθάπερ ἀπὸ1just as from the LordHere, the phrase **just as from** indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by”
3502CO318wlp1Κυρίου, Πνεύματος1Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the **Lord** as the **Spirit**, just as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Just as in that verse, he could mean that the **Lord** is the **Spirit**, or he could mean that the **Lord** is experienced as the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the **Lord** to whom the **Spirit** belongs or who sends the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit”
3512CO318mmddfigs-explicitΠνεύματος1Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “Gods Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3522CO4introrx1c0# 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Pauls ministry (2:147:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:74:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:718)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:714](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “life” or being “raised,” he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from “death” when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:36](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as “veiling,” “blinding,” and “darkness.” He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as “shining” and “light.” These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and those with him: their “inner man” and their “outer man.” The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the “inner” is connected to what is “not seen,” and the “outer” is connected to what is “seen” (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:812](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English.
3532CO41lyi4grammar-connect-logic-resultδιὰ τοῦτο1Connecting Statement:Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:418](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3542CO41ln4ngrammar-connect-logic-resultἔχοντες1Here, the word having introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3552CO41uoxlfigs-abstractnounsἔχοντες τὴν διακονίαν ταύτην1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “minister.” Alternate translation: “being able to minister in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n
3562CO41h1udfigs-explicitκαθὼς ἠλεήθημεν1and just as we have received mercyHere, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and those with him received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by Gods mercy” (2) what led to Paul and those with him receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3572CO41que0figs-abstractnounsἠλεήθημεν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mercy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “merciful” or an adverb such as “mercifully.” Alternate translation: “God acted mercifully toward us” or “God was merciful to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3582CO41ix7ntranslate-unknownοὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν1having this ministryHere, the word **discouraged** could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3592CO42yp4ggrammar-connect-logic-contrastἀλλὰ1we have rejected the shameful hidden thingsHere, the word **Instead** introduces a contrast with “becoming discouraged” in the previous verse ([4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of that” or “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3602CO42z4c2figs-explicitτὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης1the shameful hidden thingsHere, the phrase **shameful hidden {things}** could refer to: (1) things that people “hide” because they are **shameful**. Alternate translation: “the shameful things that people hide” (2) things that are both **hidden** and **shameful**. Alternate translation: “anything that is shameful and hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3612CO42ey75figs-metaphorμὴ περιπατοῦντες1walking in craftinessPaul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking in** something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with plain language. Alternate translation: “not acting” or “not behaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3622CO42vvzcfigs-abstractnounsἐν πανουργίᾳ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **craftiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “crafty” or an adverb such as “craftily.” Alternate translation: “craftily” or “in a crafty way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3632CO42lzn0translate-unknownδολοῦντες1Here, the word **distorting** refers to changing something so that it is different than how it started. In this case, Paul is referring to changing **the word of God** so that it is not purely what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to changing something or making it less pure. Alternate translation: “perverting” or “altering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3642CO42gcqmfigs-possessionτὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word that comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3652CO42gp3gfigs-metonymyτὸν λόγον1not distorting the word of GodHere, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3662CO42mrrifigs-possessionτῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **manifestation** that reveals **the truth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “by revealing the truth” or “by making the truth known** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3672CO42e7y7figs-abstractnounsτῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **manifestation** and **truth**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “reveal” and an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “by revealing what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3682CO42rqintranslate-unknownσυνιστάνοντες ἑαυτοὺς1Here, phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. See you how you translated the similar phrase in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “speaking favorably of ourselves” or “vouching for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3692CO42aj24figs-gendernotationsἀνθρώπων1commending ourselves to every persons conscienceAlthough the word **mans** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “persons” or “to mans and womans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3702CO42f6n1figs-metaphorἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ1before GodHere, Paul refers to being **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are **before God** or in Gods presence. Alternate translation: “that is in Gods presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3712CO43lu2hgrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word **But** introduces a development from what Paul said in the previous verse ([4:2](../04/02.md)). In this verse, he explains that, although they reveal “the truth,” it may be **veiled** to some people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “Now” or “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3722CO43m82qgrammar-connect-condition-factεἰ…καὶ1Here Paul could be using **even if** to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. Alternate translation: “even though” (2) something that he thinks might be true. Alternate translation: “supposing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
3732CO43mti5figs-metaphorἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον1But if our gospel is veiled, it is veiled only to those who are perishingHere Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in [3:1218](../03/12.md). A **gospel** that **is veiled** is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in [3:1218](../03/12.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3742CO43hz2ffigs-activepassiveεἰ…ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν…ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον1if our gospel is veiled, it is veiledIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “veiling” and instead refer to how a “veil” hides the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “if a veil covers our gospel, this happens for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3752CO43e5yufigs-extrainfoτοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις1our gospelChristians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
3762CO44m71dfigs-explicitὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου1Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3772CO44ptb6figs-possessionὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3782CO44r6pzfigs-metaphorἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the god of this age has blinded the minds of the unbelievingHere Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ … just like blind eyes cannot see light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3792CO44squ9grammar-connect-logic-resultἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ1Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding peoples minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding peoples minds. Alternate translation: “ of the unbelievers in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3802CO44j1vzfigs-possessionτὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the light of the gospelHere the author uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3812CO44hj21figs-abstractnounsτῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3822CO44fmaqfigs-abstractnounsὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **image**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “represent.” Alternate translation: “who reflects God” or “who represents God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3832CO44tx9hfigs-possessionεἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ1the god of this worldHere Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **Christ** functions as the **image** that shows what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the image that shows what God is like” or “the image that reflects God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3842CO45nvg2grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about “the gospel of the glory of Christ” in [4:4](../04/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
3852CO45ddw1figs-ellipsisἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν1but Christ Jesus as Lord, and ourselves as your servantsThese two clauses leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim the Lord Christ Jesus, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3862CO45xvs8Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον1Here, the phrase **Lord Christ Jesus** could: (1) give a title or name for Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who is Christ Jesus” (2) state that **Christ Jesus** is the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus as Lord”
3872CO45t8dufigs-explicitδιὰ Ἰησοῦν1for Jesus sakeHere Paul could be indicating that he and those with him are **servants** because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and those with him to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3882CO46nbptgrammar-connect-logic-resultὅτι1Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and those with him “do not proclaim” themselves but rather Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3892CO46fy6hwriting-quotationsὁ Θεὸς ὁ εἰπών1Here Paul introduces something that God **said**. The quotation is not directly from the Old Testament. Rather Paul is probably paraphrasing [Genesis 1:3](../gen/01/03.md), and he may also be referring to [Isaiah 9:2](../isa/09/02.md). Introduce the quotation as something that God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote that refers to the passages that Paul may be paraphrasing. Alternate translation: “God is the one who spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
3902CO46rw5zfigs-quotationsεἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει1Light will shine out of darknessIf you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3912CO46mukffigs-abstractnounsἐκ σκότους1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3922CO46d5x7figs-metaphorἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως1He has shone … to give the light of the knowledge of the glory of GodHere Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3932CO46bj1jfigs-metonymyἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν1in our heartsIn the Pauls culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3942CO46m6rffigs-exclusiveταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν1Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3952CO46fkq3figs-possessionφωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3962CO46mpg9figs-abstractnounsπρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ1the light of the knowledge of the glory of GodIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3972CO46p736figs-explicitἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1the glory of God in the face of Jesus ChristHere, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shone on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3982CO47xe5igrammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1But we haveHere, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and those with him are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3992CO47xx2cfigs-metaphorἔχομεν…τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν1we have this treasure in jars of clayHere Paul speaks of the knowledge about Gods glory as if it were a **treasure**, that is, something that is very valuable. He speaks of himself and those who proclaim the gospel as if they were **clay jars**, which are not valuable and can break easily. He speaks in this way to contrast how valuable and long-lasting the gospel is (**the treasure**) with how worthless and weak he and those who preach the gospel with him are in comparison (**clay jars**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we have these riches in disposable containers” or “we have this valuable gospel as weak and worthless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4002CO47yzd7writing-pronounsτὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον1Here, the word **this** identifies the **treasure** as “the knowledge of the glory of God in {the} face of Jesus Christ” (see [4:6](../04/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “the treasure of the knowledge of the glory of God” or “that treasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4012CO47nz0rtranslate-unknownὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν1Here, the word **jars** refers to any type of container that is meant to hold something else. The word **clay** refers to dirt or mud, which was used to make inexpensive and fragile containers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to containers made out of cheap and weak material. Alternate translation: “inexpensive containers” or “fragile and cheap vessels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4022CO47i1rsfigs-possessionἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως1Here Paul uses the possessive form to characterize the **power** as something with **surpassing greatness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the surpassing greatness that characterizes the power” or “the surpassingly great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4032CO47u16ofigs-abstractnounsἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **greatness** and **power**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “great” and “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how surpassingly great and powerful these things are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4042CO48ga9zfigs-activepassiveἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι; ἀπορούμενοι1We are afflicted in every wayIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use vague or indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “in every side someone pressing us in, but not crushing us; feeling perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4052CO48wqg9figs-infostructureἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι1Here, the phrase **in every {side}** could go with: (1) all the statements in this verse and the following verse. Alternate translation: “in every situation experiencing these things: being pressed in” (2) just the first statement about **being pressed in, but not being crushed**. Alternate translation: “being pressed in on every side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
4062CO48vhjnfigs-explicitἐν παντὶ1Here, the word **every** indicates that what Paul is about to describe happens often or in many situations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in every situation” or “at many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4072CO48fi9cfigs-metaphorθλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι1Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were physically being **pressed in** by other people but not **being crushed** by them. He speaks in this way to indicate that other people are making his life difficult or trying to hurt him, but they are not fully succeeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being pushed, but not being knocked over” or “being mistreated, but not being harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4082CO48i7idtranslate-unknownἀπορούμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐξαπορούμενοι1Here, the word **perplexed** refers to how someone is not sure what to do. The word **despairing** refers to giving up or refusing to do anything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that express these ideas clearly. Alternate translation: “being unsure, but not losing hope” or “being confused, but not despondent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4092CO49bz8mfigs-activepassiveδιωκόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνκαταλειπόμενοι; καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι1We are persecuted but not forsakenIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use vague or indefinite subjects for **persecuted** and **thrown down**, you indicate that God is the one who does not “forsake.” Alternate translation: “someone persecuting us, but God not forsaking us; someone throwing us down, but we not perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4102CO49uvq1figs-metaphorκαταβαλλόμενοι1We are struck down but not destroyedHere, Paul speaks as if people physically push him and those with him so that they fall down. By speaking in this way, he is referring to any time people act against or bully him and those with him, which may or may not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being bullied” or “being attacked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4112CO49mz1mtranslate-unknownοὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι1Here, the word **perishing** refers to being defeated or destroyed. Paul means that those who “throw” him and those with him down do not succeed in defeating or destroying them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural construction. Alternate translation: “not being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4122CO410zt4bfigs-metaphorτὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες1We always carry in our body the death of JesusHere Paul speaks as if **the dying of Jesus** were an object that he and those with him could “carry around.” He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the **dying of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and those with him proclaim the **dying of Jesus** both by what they say and what they do (**in the body**). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4132CO410ethcgrammar-collectivenounsτῷ σώματι…τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν1Here the author is speaking of their “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to their “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
4142CO410rnupfigs-possessionτὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **dying** that **Jesus** experienced. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the death that Jesus experienced” or “how Jesus died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4152CO410l6f6figs-explicitκαὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ1the life of Jesus also may be shown in our bodiesHere, the “revelation” of **the life of Jesus** in **our body** could mean that: (1) the **life** that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they “reveal” the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by **carrying around** Jesus death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have **life** from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4162CO410w3jcfigs-activepassiveκαὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ1the life of Jesus also may be shown in our bodiesIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal in our body the life of Jesus also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4172CO410k10lfigs-possessionἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **life** that could: (1) belong to **Jesus**. In other words, it is his resurrection life. Alternate translation: “the life that Jesus has” (2) come from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “life from Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4182CO410j23jfigs-abstractnounsἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4192CO411vivggrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification of what Paul said in [4:10](../04/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “in fact,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4202CO411l1xkfigs-activepassiveἀεὶ…ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες…παραδιδόμεθα1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is always handing us, being alive, over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4212CO411ggb5grammar-connect-time-simultaneousἀεὶ…ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες…παραδιδόμεθα1Here, the phrase **being alive** identifies the situation in which the rest of Pauls statement is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “we, during the time in which we are alive, are always being handed over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
4222CO411ht74figs-metaphorἀεὶ…εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα1For we who are alive are always being handed over to death for the sake of JesusHere Paul speaks as if he and those with him were objects that someone could “hand over” to **death**. He means that they are under the power of **death** or are experiencing things related to death, like suffering and hardship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “are always experiencing what relates to death” or “are always under deaths power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4232CO411admcfigs-abstractnounsεἰς θάνατον1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “so that we might die” or “to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4242CO411wt5ifigs-explicitδιὰ Ἰησοῦν1Here, the phrase **for the sake of Jesus** could indicate that Paul and those with him **are always being handed over to death**: (1) to serve **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of **Jesus**, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4252CO411d1wmἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν1so that the life of Jesus may be shown in our mortal fleshHere Paul uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in the second part of [4:10](../04/10.md). You should express the idea much like you did in that verse.
4262CO411ww5rfigs-activepassiveκαὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ1so that the life of Jesus may be shown in our mortal fleshIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4272CO411r513figs-abstractnounsἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4282CO411kucptranslate-unknownτῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν1Here, the phrase **mortal flesh** primarily refers to how people will die. Paul may be referring specifically to the physical part of people, but he may simply be referring to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes people as those who will die. Alternate translation: “in us who will die” or “our mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4292CO412dc7qgrammar-connect-logic-resultὥστε1Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion that is based on [4:711](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the conclusion to a section. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “In the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4302CO412q3ilfigs-personificationὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν1death is at work in us, but life is at work in youHere Paul speaks of **death** and **life** as if they were persons who could “work.” He means that he and those with experience things related to **death**, while the Corinthians experience things related to **life**. Alternate translation: “we experience death, but you experience life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4312CO412r5sefigs-abstractnounsὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν1If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live.” Alternate translation: “we are dying, but you are living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4322CO412n7orfigs-explicitδὲ1Here Paul may be: (1) simply contrasting **death and **life**. Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (2) indicating that the **death** in them leads to the **life in you**. Alternate translation: “but so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4332CO412tvnefigs-ellipsisἡ…ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν1This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “life works in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4342CO412albzfigs-explicitἡ…ζωὴ1Here, the word **life** could refer: (1) specifically to resurrection life, which the Corinthians will receive. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (2) generally to being alive and not experiencing suffering or dangerous things. Alternate translation: “the experience of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4352CO413jqmmgrammar-connect-words-phrasesδὲ1Here, the word **But** could introduce: (1) a development or new idea. Alternate translation: “Further,” (2) a contrast with the “death” that works in them. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4362CO413cckcgrammar-connect-logic-resultἔχοντες1Here, the word **having** introduces a reason or cause for why **we also believe** and **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4372CO413ret6figs-possessionτὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως1the same spirit of faithHere Paul uses the possessive to refer a **spirit** that could: (1) be characterized by **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same believing spirit” (2) give or cause **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same spirit that gives faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4382CO413wrr3τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα1Here, the word **spirit** could refer to: (1) a human spirit or attitude, which is characterized by faith. Alternate translation: “the same attitude” (2) the Holy Spirit, who gives **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same Holy Spirit”
4392CO413ery0figs-explicitτὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως1Here, the word **same** could indicate that: (1) this is the **same spirit** that the person who wrote the quotation had. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that the psalmist had,” (2) this is the **same spirit** that the Corinthians also have. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that you have,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4402CO413qma7figs-abstractnounsτῆς πίστεως1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “that believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4412CO413gzf4figs-activepassiveτὸ γεγραμμένον1according to that which was writtenIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “what the psalmist wrote” or “to what the psalm says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4422CO413il5hwriting-quotationsκατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον1I believed, and so I spokeIn Pauls culture, **according to {what} has been written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 116:10](../psa/116/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “as it says in the book of Psalms,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
4432CO413vshyfigs-quotationsτὸ γεγραμμένον, ἐπίστευσα, διὸ ἐλάλησα;1If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “how it was written that he believed; therefore he spoke,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
4442CO414sfxbgrammar-connect-logic-resultεἰδότες1Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for what Paul said that he and those with him do (see [4:13](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4452CO414ruovwriting-pronounsὁ ἐγείρας1Here, the word **one** refers to God the Father, who **raised Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “God who raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4462CO414t2i8figs-idiomὁ ἐγείρας τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἡμᾶς…ἐγερεῖ1that the one who raised the Lord Jesus will … raisePaul uses the words **raised** and **raise** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one having restored Jesus to life will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4472CO414zd0jfigs-explicitσὺν Ἰησοῦ1Here, the phrase **with Jesus** could indicate that the Paul and those with him will: (1) be where **Jesus** is. Alternate translation: “to be where Jesus is” (2) be resurrected as **Jesus** was. Alternate translation: “as he raised Jesus” (3) be joined with **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “together with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4482CO414zmzytranslate-unknownπαραστήσει σὺν ὑμῖν1Here, the phrase **will present** refers to causing someone to stand in front of or beside someone else. Here, the idea is most likely that God causes Paul and those with him to stand before God and beside **you**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “will set us before him next to you” or “will bring us together before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4492CO415w37zgrammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul has said in [4:714](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4502CO415v7sjfigs-explicitτὰ…πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς1For all these things are for your sakeHere, the phrase **all these {things}** refers to everything that Paul and those with him do and experience as they preach the gospel, including their sufferings (see [4:712](../04/07.md)) and the message that they preach (see [4:1314](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described is for your sake” or “everything I have referred to is for your sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4512CO415wl88figs-explicitἡ χάρις1Here Paul implies that the **grace** comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “grace from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4522CO415lg1lfigs-abstractnounsἡ χάρις1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “how God is gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4532CO415xdxkfigs-explicitδιὰ τῶν πλειόνων1Here, the phrase **through more and more** could indicate that: (1) the **grace** increases by being received by **more** people. Alternate translation: “among more and more people” (2) the **grace** increases because God uses **more** situations and experiences to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “by means of more and more service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4542CO415u8ppfigs-abstractnounsτὴν εὐχαριστίαν περισσεύσῃ εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ1thanksgiving may increaseIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **thanksgiving** and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “thank” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “may cause people to abound in thanking God to glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4552CO415zt5hfigs-possessionεἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **glory** that **God** receives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to glory for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4562CO416u6e5grammar-connect-logic-resultδιὸ1Connecting Statement:Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has said, probably focusing on what he said in [4:715](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion from a previous section. Alternate translation: “So then,” or “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4572CO416p7pvtranslate-unknownοὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν1See you how translated the word **discouraged** in [4:1](../04/01.md). It refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4582CO416cb92grammar-connect-condition-factεἰ καὶ1So we do not become discouragedHere Paul is speaking as if **our outer man is decaying** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that **our outer man** is indeed **decaying**. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that” or “although” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
4592CO416hhv6figs-explicitὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος1outwardly we are wasting awayHere, the phrase **outer man** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others can observe and see. Alternate translation: “our observable part” or “our external part” (2) the physical part of the person. Alternate translation: “our body” or “our physical part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4602CO416pnmsfigs-gendernotationsἄνθρωπος…ἔσω1Although the word **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person … inner person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4612CO416jcragrammar-collectivenounsἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται…ἔσω…ἀνακαινοῦται1Here the author is speaking of **outer** and **inner** “men” in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “men” or “people” in general. Alternate translation: “men are decaying … inner men are being renewed” or “persons are decaying … outer persons are being renewed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
4622CO416vliufigs-metaphorδιαφθείρεται1Here Paul speaks as if the **outer man** were a dead thing that was **decaying**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **outer man** is in the process of dying or passing away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “is dying” or “is passing away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4632CO416s9b2figs-explicitὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν1inwardly we are being renewed day by dayHere, the phrase **inner {man}** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others cannot observe and see. Alternate translation: “our hidden part” or “our inward part” (2) the spiritual part of the person. Alternate translation: “our heart” or “our spiritual part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4642CO416zct5figs-activepassiveὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται1inwardly we are being renewed day by dayIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is renewing our inner man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4652CO416l0jkfigs-idiom ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ1Here, the phrase **day {by} day** refers to something that happens one day, and then the next day, and so on. One way of expressing this idea is with the phrase “every day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to sequential days. Alternate translation: “each day” or “every single day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4662CO417no4agrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “do not become discouraged” (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We do not become discouraged because” or “We do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4672CO417e4s0figs-abstractnounsτὸ…παραυτίκα ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **affliction**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “afflict” or “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how we are afflicted in light and momentary ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4682CO417x1dutranslate-unknownπαραυτίκα1Here, the word **momentary** identifies something as temporary or only lasting for a short time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “short-lived” or “fleeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4692CO417pd63figs-metaphorἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως…αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης1this momentary, light affliction is preparing us for an eternal weight of gloryHere Paul describes **affliction** and **glory** as if they were objects that could be **light** or have **weight**. He speaks in this way to indicate how unimportant or insignificant the **affliction** is compared with how important or significant the **glory** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “small affliction … an eternal, great glory” or “insignificant affliction … an eternal, significant glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4702CO417jzhifigs-metaphorκατεργάζεται ἡμῖν1Here Paul speaks as if the **affliction** were a process that was **producing** the **glory**. He means that the **affliction** leads to **glory** for **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “is leading us to” or “is enabling us to gain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4712CO417qv6ffigs-possessionαἰώνιον βάρος δόξης1Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **an eternal weight** that is made up of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “an eternal weight that is glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4722CO417xg92figs-abstractnounsδόξης1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of what is great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4732CO417na9yfigs-idiomκαθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν1that exceeds all measurementHere, the phrase **far beyond all comparison** identifies something that is much greater than anything else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies something that is greatest or most amazing. Alternate translation: “that is greater than anything” or “that is the greatest of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4742CO418thyvgrammar-connect-logic-resultμὴ σκοπούντων ἡμῶν1Here, the phrase **We are not watching** could introduce: (1) a result or inference from what Paul said about “affliction” and “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, we are not watching” (2) what Paul does while he experiences the “affliction” he mentions in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true while we are not watching” (3) the reason why the “affliction” leads to “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true because we are not watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4752CO418fp4ffigs-explicitμὴ σκοπούντων1Here, the word **watching** refers specifically to focusing on something or paying close attention to something. It does not require the attention or focus to be visual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to non-visual focus or attention. Alternate translation: “are not focusing on” or “are not concentrating on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4762CO418t2fpfigs-activepassiveτὰ βλεπόμενα, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα1things that are seen … things that are unseenIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “the things that people see, but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4772CO418f97xfigs-ellipsisἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα1but for things that are unseenThis clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4782CO418hbrggrammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **We** are **watching** the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4792CO418kx7mfigs-activepassiveτὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα…τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4802CO5intros14p0# 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### New bodies in heaven\n\nPaul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### New creation\n\nThe old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term “old” probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The “new creation” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Home\n\nThe Christians home is no longer in the world. A Christians real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christians circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### “The message of reconciliation”\n\nThis refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])
4812CO51p7b7grammar-connect-words-phrasesγὰρ1Connecting Statement:(1) an explanation of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4822CO51v03zfigs-exclusiveοἴδαμεν…ἡμῶν…ἔχομεν1Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4832CO51la71grammar-connect-condition-factἐὰν1Here, the word **if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
4842CO51z4vsfigs-exmetaphorἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς1if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed, we have a building from GodHere Paul speaks as if a persons body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** that the person lives in. This was a common way to refer to a persons body in Pauls culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down** because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:19](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify what the **house** is in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
4852CO51zy2kfigs-activepassiveἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ1if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4862CO51bvz6figs-possessionἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους1Here, Paul uses the possessive form identify the **earthly house** as a **tent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “our earthly house, which is a tent,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
4872CO51xiflfigs-explicitἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς1Many people in Pauls culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here, Paul refers to how the **eternal house** can be found **in the heavens**. Since Paul does not include details about the heavens, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4882CO51bqi5figs-synecdocheἀχειροποίητον1It is a house not made by human handsHere, the word **hands** refers to the main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **hands** refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “not made by humans” or “not made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4892CO51bbvrfigs-activepassiveἀχειροποίητον1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which hands did not make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4902CO52mt4sgrammar-connect-words-phrasesκαὶ γὰρ1Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous verse (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4912CO52tc2jwriting-pronounsἐν τούτῳ1in this tent we groanHere, the phrase **in this** could refer to: (1) the earthly house that is a tent, that is, the persons current body. Alternate translation: “in this tent” or “in our bodies on earth” (2) the current time period. Alternate translation: “right now” or “in this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4922CO52yg6yfigs-exmetaphorἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν, τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες1Here Paul continues to refer to mortal bodies and resurrection bodies as “houses” or “dwellings.” You should express the idea as you did in [5:1](../05/01.md). Paul also begins to refer to receiving new, resurrection bodies as if they were clothing that people could put on. This also is an important figure of speech for the following verses, so preserve the language if possible. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea in another natural way that fits with the “building” language. Alternate translation: “in this house, that is, our mortal body, we groan, longing to completely live in our dwelling that is from heaven, that is, our resurrection body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
4932CO52ss6gfigs-activepassiveἐπενδύσασθαι1longing to be clothed with our heavenly dwellingIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to fully clothe us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4942CO53bjaufigs-exmetaphorἐνδυσάμενοι, οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα1Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as if they were clothing. You should express the idea as you did in [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “we have a house to live in, we will not be found homeless” or “having a new body that is like clothing, we will not be found naked, that is, without a body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
4952CO53da0zgrammar-connect-condition-factεἴ γε…ἐνδυσάμενοι1Here Paul is speaking as if **having clothed ourselves** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will actually be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when” or “whenever.” Alternate translation: “when indeed we have clothed ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
4962CO53i4esἐνδυσάμενοι1we have put it onHere Paul could mean that: (1) **we** clothe **ourselves**. Alternate translation: “we clothe ourselves” (2) God clothes “us.” Alternate translation: “God clothes us”
4972CO53ap7vfigs-activepassiveοὐ…εὑρεθησόμεθα1we will not be found to be nakedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **naked** rather than on who “finds” them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **found**. Alternate translation: “we will not be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4982CO54zvz8grammar-connect-words-phrasesκαὶ γὰρ1Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous two verses (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
4992CO54bz6kfigs-exmetaphorοἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει…οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι1while we are in this tentHere Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in [5:13](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
5002CO54e34bfigs-metaphorβαρούμενοι1in this tent, we groanHere Paul speaks as if he and those with were carrying a heavy “burden.” He means that something is making their lives difficult. The “burden” could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, fall apart and die. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5012CO54g9yufigs-activepassiveβαρούμενοι1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the **tent** (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5022CO54f8rbfigs-activepassiveοὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι1We do not want to be unclothed … we want to be clothedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5032CO54nezofigs-ellipsisἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι1This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
5042CO54n78pfigs-nominaladjτὸ θνητὸν1to be unclothedPaul is using the adjective **mortal** as a noun in order to refer to all bodies that are **mortal**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the mortal bodies” or “what is mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5052CO54uieitranslate-unknownτὸ θνητὸν1
5062CO54e5zifigs-activepassiveκαταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς1so that what is mortal may be swallowed up by life
5072CO54de2bfigs-metaphorκαταποθῇ1so that what is mortal may be swallowed up by life
5082CO54y0dbfigs-abstractnounsτῆς ζωῆς1
5092CO55g7yjfigs-metaphorὁ δοὺς ἡμῖν τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος1who gave us the Spirit as the down paymentThe **Spirit** is spoken of as if he were a partial **down payment** toward eternal life. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2 Corinthians 1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5102CO56clh50Connecting Statement:Because believers will have a new body and have the Holy Spirit as a pledge, Paul reminds them to live by faith that they may please the Lord. He continues by reminding them to persuade others because: (1) believers will appear at the judgment seat of Christ. (2) Christ who died for believers in love.
5112CO56xv3mfigs-metaphorἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι1being at home in the bodyPaul speaks of the physical **body** as if it were a place where a person dwells. Alternate translation: “while we are living in this earthly body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5122CO56ebl4ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου1we are away from the LordAlternate translation: “we are not at home with the Lord” or “we are not in heaven with the Lord”
5132CO57rfn4figs-metaphorδιὰ πίστεως…περιπατοῦμεν, οὐ διὰ εἴδους1we walk by faith, not by sightHere, **walk** is a metaphor for “live” or “behave.” Alternate translation: “we live according to faith, not according to what we see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5142CO58a6auεὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος1we would rather be away from the bodyHere the word **body** refers to the physical body.
5152CO58i3m3ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον1at home with the LordAlternate translation: “at home with the Lord in heaven”
5162CO59ml5jfigs-ellipsisεἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες1whether we are at home or awayThe phrases “with the Lord” and “from the Lord” may be supplied from the previous verses. Alternate translation: “whether we are at home with the Lord or away from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
5172CO59j1slεὐάρεστοι αὐτῷ εἶναι1to be pleasing to himAlternate translation: “to please the Lord”
5182CO510kdf2ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ1before the judgment seat of ChristAlternate translation: “before Christ to be judged”
5192CO510c499κομίσηται ἕκαστος1each one may receive back the things done inAlternate translation: “each person may receive what he deserves for”
5202CO510v8slfigs-activepassiveτὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος1the things done in the bodyIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things he has done in the physical body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5212CO510lsh8εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν1whether for good or for badAlternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad”
5222CO511dzh5εἰδότες…τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου1knowing the fear of the LordAlternate translation: “knowing what it means to fear the Lord”
5232CO511qm34figs-explicitἀνθρώπους πείθομεν1we persuade peopleThis could mean: (1) **we persuade** people of the truth of the gospel. (2) **we persuade** people that we are legitimate apostles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5242CO511v11vfigs-activepassiveΘεῷ…πεφανερώμεθα1What we are is clearly seen by GodIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God clearly sees what kind of people we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5252CO511y5l1καὶ ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι1that it is also clear to your conscienceAlternate translation: “that you are also convinced of it”
5262CO512mza1ἵνα ἔχητε1so you may have an answerAlternate translation: “so you may have something to say to”
5272CO512it2rfigs-metonymyτοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ1those who boast about appearances but not about what is in the heartHere the word **face** refers to outward expressions of things like ability and status. The word **heart** refers to the inward character of a person. Alternate translation: “those who praise their own actions, but do not care about what they really are in their inner being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5282CO513cy57figs-idiomεἴτε…ἐξέστημεν…εἴτε σωφρονοῦμεν1if we are out of our minds … if we are in our right mindsPaul is speaking about the way others think of him and his coworkers. Alternate translation: “if people think we are crazy … if people think we are sane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5292CO514azi9ἡ γὰρ ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the love of ChristThis could refer to: (1) our **love** for **Christ**. (2) Christs **love** for us.
5302CO514nd9gὑπὲρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν1died for allAlternate translation: “died for all people”
5312CO515h831τῷ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἀποθανόντι καὶ ἐγερθέντι1him who for their sake died and was raisedAlternate translation: “for him who for their sake died and whom God caused to live again” or “for Christ, who died for their sake and whom God raised”
5322CO515ri6fτῷ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἀποθανόντι καὶ ἐγερθέντι1for themHere, **for the one** could refer: (1) only to **who died**. (2) to both **who died** and **was raised**.
5332CO516f2ww0Connecting Statement:Because of Christs love and death, we are not to judge by human standards. We are appointed to teach others how to be united with and have peace with God through Christs death and receive Gods righteousness through Christ.
5342CO516ic21ὥστε1For this reasonHere, **Therefore** refers to what Paul has just said about living for Christ instead of living for self.
5352CO517tl3hfigs-metaphorκαινὴ κτίσις1he is a new creationPaul speaks of the person who believes in Christ as if God had created **a new** person. Alternate translation: “he is a new person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5362CO517ue8fτὰ ἀρχαῖα παρῆλθεν1The old things have passed awayHere, **The old things** refers to the things that characterized a person before they trusted in Christ.
5372CO517vpe3ἰδοὺ1SeeThe word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
5382CO518jyf7τὰ…πάντα1All these thingsHere, **all these things** refers to what Paul has just said in the previous verse about new things replacing old things.
5392CO518lj2hfigs-abstractnounsτὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς1the ministry of reconciliationIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **reconciliation**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “the ministry of reconciling people to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5402CO519w1d1figs-metonymyἦν ἐν Χριστῷ κόσμον καταλλάσσων ἑαυτῷ1in Christ God is reconciling the world to himselfHere, **the world** refers to the people in the world. Alternate translation: “in Christ, God was reconciling mankind to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5412CO519b62qθέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς1He is entrusting to us the message of reconciliationGod has given Paul the responsibility to spread the message that God is reconciling people to himself.
5422CO519ix97τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς1the message of reconciliationAlternate translation: “the message about reconciliation”
5432CO520wg8ffigs-activepassiveὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ οὖν πρεσβεύομεν1Therefore, we are ambassadors for ChristIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has appointed us as Christs representatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5442CO520q9u9ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ…πρεσβεύομεν1representatives of ChristAlternate translation: “we are those who speak for Christ”
5452CO520a6fxfigs-activepassiveκαταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ1Be reconciled to GodIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5462CO521jp2aτὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν1The one who did not know sin, he made sin for usAlternate translation: “God made Christ become the sacrifice for our sin”
5472CO521hz6zfigs-exclusiveἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς1us … weHere the words **us** and **we** are inclusive and refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5482CO521ebz2τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν1The one who did not know sinAlternate translation: “Christ, the one who never sinned”
5492CO521kmt9figs-explicitἵνα ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ1so that we might become the righteousness of God in himThe phrase **the righteousness of God** refers to the righteousness that God requires and which comes from God. Alternate translation: “so that we might have Gods righteousness in us through Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5502CO6introf5qu0# 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Servants<br><br>Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Contrasts<br><br>Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### We<br><br>Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
5512CO61kf1d0Connecting Statement:Paul summarizes how working together for God is supposed to be.
5522CO61tbr6figs-explicitσυνεργοῦντες1Working togetherPaul is implying that he and Timothy are **working** with God. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5532CO61s8dbfigs-doublenegativesκαὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς1we also urge you not to receive the grace of God in vainPaul pleads with the Corinthians to allow the **grace of God** to be effective in their lives. If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … in vain**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “we beg you to make use of the grace that you have received from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5542CO62u9kcfigs-explicitλέγει γάρ1For he saysThis introduces a quotation from the prophet Isaiah. Alternate translation: “for God says in scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5552CO62sa94ἰδοὺ1LookThe word **Behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
5562CO63v3wcfigs-metaphorμηδεμίαν ἐν μηδενὶ διδόντες προσκοπήν1We do not place a stumbling block in front of anyonePaul speaks of anything that would prevent a person from trusting in Christ as if it were a physical object over which that person trips and falls. Alternate translation: “we do not want to do anything that will prevent people from believing our message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5572CO63he3cfigs-activepassiveμὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία1our ministry might notThe word **discredited** refers to people speaking badly about Pauls ministry, and working against the message he proclaims. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no oner will be able to speak badly about our ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5582CO64xd9lfigs-exclusiveσυνιστάντες1General Information:When Paul uses **we** here, he is referring to himself and Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5592CO64p9upἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι1we commend ourselves in everything as Gods servantsAlternate translation: “we prove that we are Gods servants by all that we do”
5602CO64xyf9Θεοῦ διάκονοι: ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις1Gods servants; in much endurance, affliction, distress, hardshipPaul mentions these difficult situations in which they proved that they are **Gods servants**.
5612CO66w84cἐν ἁγνότητι…ἐν ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ1in purity … in genuine lovePaul lists several moral virtues that they maintained in difficult situations that proved that they are Gods servants.
5622CO67b6amἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας, ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ1in the word of truth, in the power of GodTheir dedication to preach the gospel **in the power of God** proves that they are Gods servants.
5632CO67dui6ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας1in the word of truthAlternate translation: “by speaking Gods message about truth” or “by speaking Gods true message”
5642CO67p5l5ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ1in the power of GodAlternate translation: “by showing Gods power to people”
5652CO67ven8figs-metaphorδιὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν1through the weapons of righteousness for the right hand and for the leftPaul speaks of their **righteousness** as if it is **weapons** that they use to fight spiritual battles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5662CO67ef5bτῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης1the weapons of righteousnessAlternate translation: “righteousness as our armor” or “righteousness as our weapons”
5672CO67ijr2τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν1for the right hand and for the leftThis could mean: (1) there is a weapon in one hand and a shield in the other. (2) they are completely equipped for battle, able to fend off attacks from any direction.
5682CO68zi7dfigs-merism0General Information:Paul lists several extremes of how people think about him and his ministry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
5692CO68e4pffigs-activepassiveὡς πλάνοι1as impostersIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people accuse us of being deceitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5702CO69fcb5figs-activepassiveὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι1as if we were unknown and we are still well knownIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as if people did not know us and yet people still know us well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5712CO69r1d9figs-activepassiveὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι1as being punished, and yet not being killedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we work as if people are punishing us for our actions but not as if they have condemned us to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5722CO611v74jτὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς1Our mouth has been opened to youAlternate translation: “We have spoken honestly to you”
5732CO611mv85figs-metaphorἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται1our heart is opened widePaul speaks of his great affection for the Corinthians as having a **heart** that is open. Alternate translation: “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5742CO611r815figs-metonymyἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται1Here, **heart** is a metonym for a persons emotions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5752CO612m2kqfigs-metaphorοὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν1Paul speaks of the Corinthians lack of love for him as if their **inner parts** were squeezed into a tight space. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5762CO612u4fzfigs-activepassiveοὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν1You are not restrained by usIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We have not restrained you” or “We have not given you any reason to stop loving us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5772CO612xv9tfigs-metonymyστενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν1You are not restrained by us, but you are restrained in your affectionsHere, **inner parts** is a metonym for a persons emotions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5782CO612ecn4figs-activepassiveστενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν1you are restrained in your affectionsIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but your own hearts are restraining you” or “but you have stopped loving us for your own reasons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5792CO613c6vpfigs-metaphorπλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς1open yourselves wide alsoPaul urges the Corinthians to love him as he has loved them. Alternate translation: “love us back” or “love us much as we have loved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5802CO614v7kkfigs-doublenegativesμὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις1Do not be yoked together with unbelieversIf your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … unbelievers**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “Only be tied together with believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5812CO614qd33figs-metaphorμὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες1be yoked together withPaul speaks of working **together** toward a common purpose as if it were two animals tied together to pull a plow or cart. Alternate translation: “Do not team up” or “Do not have a close relationship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5822CO614v7pwfigs-rquestionτίς γὰρ μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ1For what association does righteousness have with lawlessness?This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “For righteousness can have no association with lawlessness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5832CO614xr52figs-rquestionἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?1For what fellowship does light have with darkness?Paul asks this question to emphasize that **light** and **darkness** cannot coexist since light dispels darkness. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And light can have no fellowship with darkness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5842CO614h9ksfigs-metaphorἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος?1The words **light** and **darkness** refer to the moral and spiritual qualities of believers and unbelievers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5852CO615r1vqfigs-rquestionτίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ1What agreement can Christ have with Beliar?This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There is no agreement between Christ and Beliar!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5862CO615rm3rtranslate-namesΒελιάρ1Beliar**Beliar** is another name for the devil. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5872CO615z9ivfigs-rquestionἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου?1Or what share does a believer have together with an unbeliever?This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And a believer shares nothing in common with an unbeliever!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5882CO616y99xfigs-rquestionτίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων?1And what agreement is there between the temple of God and idols?This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And there is no agreement between the temple of God and idols!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5892CO616s3l8figs-exclusiveἡμεῖς γὰρ ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος1we are the temple of the living GodHere, **we** refers not only to Paul and his associates, but includes all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5902CO616aqqlfigs-metaphorἡμεῖς γὰρ ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος1Paul speaks of Christians as forming a **temple** for **God** to dwell in. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple where the living God dwells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5912CO616u5g3figs-parallelismἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω1I will dwell among them and walk among them.This is an Old Testament quotation that speaks of God being with the people in two different ways that mean the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
5922CO616g0nlfigs-metaphorἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω1The words **dwell among** speak of living where others live, while the words **walk among** speak of being with them as they go about their lives. Alternate translation: “I will be with them and help them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5932CO617fe1z0General Information:Paul quotes portions from the Old Testament prophets, Isaiah and Ezekiel.
5942CO617z5ldfigs-activepassiveἀφορίσθητε1be separateIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “set yourselves apart” or “allow me to set you apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5952CO617c8jqfigs-doublenegativesἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε1Touch no unclean thingIf your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **no unclean**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “touch only things that are clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5962CO7introhg360# 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus return and the comfort it brought.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Clean and unclean<br><br>Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Sadness and sorrow<br><br>The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### We<br><br>Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.<br><br>### Original situation<br><br>This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5972CO71h5xvἀγαπητοί1BelovedAlternate translation: “you whom I love” or “dear friends”
5982CO71fv49καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς1let us cleanse ourselvesHere Paul is saying to stay away from any form of sin that would affect ones relationship with God.
5992CO71c2xfἐπιτελοῦντες ἁγιωσύνην1perfecting holinessAlternate translation: “striving to be holy”
6002CO71pt41ἐν φόβῳ Θεοῦ1in the fear of GodAlternate translation: “out of deep respect for God”
6012CO72v4nu0Connecting Statement:Having already warned the people of Corinth about other leaders who were striving to get these Corinthian believers to follow them, Paul reminds the people of the way he feels about them.
6022CO72x3lgfigs-explicitχωρήσατε ἡμᾶς1Make room for usThis refers back to what Paul said starting in [2 Corinthians 6:11](../06/11.md) about them opening their hearts to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6032CO72c2yzfigs-metaphorχωρήσατε ἡμᾶς1Paul speaks of the Corinthians loving him as if they were opening their hearts to him. Alternate translation: “Make room for us in your hearts” or “Love us and accept us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6042CO73bhb7πρὸς κατάκρισιν οὐ λέγω1I do not speak for your condemnationHere, Paul refers back to what he has just said about not having wronged anyone. Alternate translation: “I do not say this to accuse you of having done wrong.”
6052CO73fay3figs-metaphorἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε1you are in our heartsPaul speaks of his and his associates great love for the Corinthians as if they held them in their hearts. Alternate translation: “you are very dear to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6062CO73xzg3figs-idiomεἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν1for us to die together and to live togetherThis means that Paul and his associates will continue to love the Corinthians no matter what happens. Alternate translation: “whether we live or whether we die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6072CO74mh12figs-activepassiveπεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει1I am filled with encouragementIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You fill me with comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6082CO74mx9bfigs-metaphorὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ1I overflow with joyPaul speaks of **joy** as if it is a liquid that fills him until he overflows. Alternate translation: “I am extremely joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6092CO74mr75ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν1even in all our afflictionsAlternate translation: “despite all our hardships”
6102CO75f3c5figs-exclusiveἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς Μακεδονίαν1When we came to MacedoniaHere the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy but not to the Corinthians or Titus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6112CO75c8jufigs-synecdocheοὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν1our flesh had no restHere, **our flesh** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “we had no rest” or “we were very tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
6122CO75h3cvfigs-activepassiveἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι1we were troubled in every wayIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we experienced every kind of trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6132CO75i4wrfigs-explicitἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι1by conflicts on the outside and fears on the insideHere, **without** could mean: (1) “outside of our bodies.” (2) “outside of the church.” The word **within** refers to their inward emotions. Alternate translation: “by conflicts with other people and by fears within ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6142CO77w7tdfigs-explicitἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν1by the comfort that Titus had received from youPaul received **comfort** from knowing that the Corinthians had **comforted** Titus. Alternate translation: “by learning about the comfort that Titus had received from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6152CO78b2xjἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη1General Information:This refers to Pauls previous **letter** to these Corinthian believers where he rebuked them for their acceptance of a believers sexual immorality with his fathers wife.
6162CO78vk7mβλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη1when I saw that my letterAlternate translation: “when I learned that my letter”
6172CO79kn5qfigs-activepassiveοὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε1not because you were distressedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not because what I said in my letter distressed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6182CO79l6d2figs-idiomἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν1you would not suffer loss in anything through usThis means that although the letter caused them sorrow, they eventually benefited from the letter because it led them to repentance. Alternate translation: “so that we did not harm you in any way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6192CO710dtm3figs-ellipsisἡ γὰρ κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν…ἐργάζεται1For the sorrow that God intends produces repentance that leads to salvationThe word **repentance** may be repeated to clarify its relationship to what precedes it and what follows it. Alternate translation: “For godly sorrow produces repentance, and repentance leads to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
6202CO710lc4mἀμεταμέλητον1without regretThis could mean: (1) Paul has no **regret** that he caused them sorrow because that sorrow led to their repentance and salvation. (2) the Corinthians will not **regret** experiencing sorrow because it led to their repentance and salvation.
6212CO710lc1sfigs-explicitἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη, θάνατον κατεργάζεται1But the sorrow of the world produces deathThis kind of **sorrow** leads to **death** instead of salvation because it does not produce repentance. Alternate translation: “Worldly sorrow, however, leads to spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6222CO711gpp2figs-exclamationsἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν1what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselvesHere the word **what** makes this statement an exclamation. Alternate translation: “your determination to prove you were innocent was very great!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
6232CO711h6jcfigs-activepassiveἀλλὰ ἐκδίκησιν1what avenging of wrongIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone should carry out justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6242CO712i6snfigs-activepassiveτοῦ φανερωθῆναι τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ1your good will toward us should be made known to you in the sight of GodIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you would know that your good will toward us is sincere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6252CO712ycy7ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ1before GodHere, **before God** refers to Gods presence. See how you translated this in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md).
6262CO713kn2qfigs-activepassiveδιὰ τοῦτο παρακεκλήμεθα1For this reason we are encouragedHere the phrase **this reason** refers to the way the Corinthians responded to Pauls previous letter, as he described in the previous verse. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is what encourages us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6272CO713v2g6figs-activepassiveἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν1his spirit was refreshed by all of youHere the word **spirit** refers to a persons temperament and disposition. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all of you refreshed his spirit” or “all of you made him stop worrying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6282CO714b4uqὅτι εἴ τι αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν κεκαύχημαι1For if I boasted to him about youAlternate translation: “For although I boasted to him about you”
6292CO714m22cοὐ κατῃσχύνθην1I was not embarrassedAlternate translation: “you did not disappoint me”
6302CO714q5hgἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη1our boasting about you to Titus proved to be trueAlternate translation: “you proved to Titus that our boasting about you was true”
6312CO715d87jfigs-abstractnounsτὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν1the obedience of all of youIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **obedience**, you can express the same idea with the verb, “obey.” Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6322CO715g9bzfigs-doubletμετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν1you welcomed him with fear and tremblingHere, **fear** and **trembling** share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: “you welcomed him with great reverence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
6332CO715q47hμετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου1with fear and tremblingThis could refer to: (1) great reverence for God. (2) great reverence for Titus.
6342CO8introkl7m0# 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Gift to the church in Jerusalem<br><br>The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### We<br><br>Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](../08/02.md))
6352CO81mm8g0Connecting Statement:Having explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving.
6362CO81d1mjfigs-activepassiveτὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας1the grace of God that has been given to the churches of MacedoniaIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6372CO82fsq8figs-personificationἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν, ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν1the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosityPaul speaks of **joy** and **poverty** as if they were living things that can produce generosity. Alternate translation: “because of the peoples great joy and extreme poverty, they have become very generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
6382CO82b7k5figs-metaphorἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν1the abundance of their joyPaul speaks of **joy** as if it were a physical object that could increase in size or quantity. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6392CO82pr8cἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν…τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν1their deep poverty … the riches of their generosityThough the churches of Macedonia have suffered testings of affliction and **poverty**, by Gods grace, they have been able to collect money for the believers in Jerusalem.
6402CO82z6mtτὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν1the riches of their generosityThe word **riches** emphasizes the greatness of their generosity. Alternate translation: “a very great generosity”
6412CO84nmw8figs-explicitτῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους1this ministry to the saintsPaul is referring to providing money to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “this ministry of providing for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6422CO86z42yκαθὼς προενήρξατο1he had already begun this taskPaul is referring to the collection of money from the Corinthians for the believers in Jerusalem.
6432CO86vn4ufigs-explicitκαὶ ἐπιτελέσῃ εἰς ὑμᾶς καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην1he would complete among you this act of graceTitus was to help the Corinthians to complete the collection of money. Alternate translation: “he should encourage you to finish collecting and giving your generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6442CO87fpe1figs-metaphorἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι περισσεύητε1you should abound in this act of gracePaul speaks of the Corinthian believers as if they should produce physical goods. Alternate translation: “make sure you do well in giving for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6452CO88wn2kfigs-explicitδιὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς…τὸ τῆς ὑμετέρας ἀγάπης γνήσιον δοκιμάζων1to test … through the diligence of othersPaul is encouraging the Corinthians to give generously by comparing them with the generosity of the Macedonian churches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6462CO89c1chτὴν χάριν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν1the grace of our LordIn this context, the word **grace** emphasizes the generosity with which Jesus had blessed the Corinthians.
6472CO89iz6zfigs-metaphorδι’ ὑμᾶς ἐπτώχευσεν, πλούσιος ὤν1though he was rich, for your sakes he became poorPaul speaks of Jesus before his incarnation as **being rich**, and of his becoming human as becoming **poor**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6482CO89j5ymfigs-metaphorὑμεῖς τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ πλουτήσητε1through his poverty you might become richPaul speaks of the Corinthians becoming spiritually **rich** as a result of Jesus becoming human. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6492CO810b7htfigs-explicitἐν τούτῳ1In this matterHere the word **this** refers to Corinthians collecting money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “with regard to the collection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6502CO811fc27figs-abstractnounsκαθάπερ ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν1there was the readiness of your desireIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **readiness**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “just as you were eager and desired to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6512CO811d6lyκαὶ τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι1there may be the completionAlternate translation: “complete it” or “finish it”
6522CO812k9whκαθὸ ἐὰν ἔχῃ1according to whatever a person hasAlternate translation: “if it is proportional to what the person giving has”
6532CO813mp6k0For thisThis verse refers back to collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem.
6542CO813smk2figs-activepassiveἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις1for the ease of others, and your afflictionIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you may relieve others and burden yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6552CO813ktd1ἐξ ἰσότητος1for the sake of equalityAlternate translation: “so that there would be equality”
6562CO814v7ajἵνα καὶ τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα1This is also so that their abundance may supply your needSince the Corinthians are acting in the present time, it is implied that the believers in Jerusalem will also help them at some time in the future. Alternate translation: “this is also so that in the future their abundance may supply your need”
6572CO815ue8wfigs-activepassiveκαθὼς γέγραπται1as it is writtenHere Paul quotes from Exodus. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language.If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6582CO815u28yfigs-doublenegativesοὐκ ἠλαττόνησεν1did not have too littleIf your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … too little**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “had all he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
6592CO816cr18figs-synecdocheτῷ διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου1who put into Titus heart the same earnest care that I have for youHere, **heart** refers to the emotions. This means that God caused Titus to love them. Alternate translation: “the one who made Titus care for you as much as I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
6602CO816vsm3τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν1same earnest careAlternate translation: “the same enthusiasm” or “same deep concern”
6612CO817e4xnfigs-explicitὅτι τὴν μὲν παράκλησιν ἐδέξατο1For he not only accepted our appealPaul is referring to his asking Titus to return to Corinth and complete the collection. Alternate translation: “For he not only agreed to our request that he help you with the collection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6622CO818rje2μετ’ αὐτοῦ1with himAlternate translation: “with Titus”
6632CO818jll9figs-activepassiveτὸν ἀδελφὸν, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος…διὰ πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν1the brother who is praised among all of the churchesIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brother whom believers among all of the churches praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6642CO819j9rkοὐ μόνον1Not only thisAlternate translation: “not only do believers among all of the churches praise him”
6652CO819c667figs-activepassiveκαὶ χειροτονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν1he also was selected by the churchesIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the churches also selected him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6662CO819k7dyσὺν τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν1along with this act of grace which is being administered by usThis refers to taking the offering to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to carry out this act of generosity”
6672CO819v22xπροθυμίαν ἡμῶν1our readinessAlternate translation: “our eagerness to help”
6682CO820a3psfigs-abstractnounsἐν τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν1concerning this generosity that we are carrying outThis refers to taking the offering to Jerusalem. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **administration**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “concerning the way we are handling this generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6692CO821n4x1προνοοῦμεν γὰρ καλὰ1For we considered beforehand what is rightAlternate translation: “We are careful to handle this gift in an honorable way”
6702CO821ey5nἐνώπιον Κυρίου…ἐνώπιον ἀνθρώπων1before the Lord … before peopleAlternate translation: “in the Lords opinion … in peoples opinion”
6712CO822d3yjαὐτοῖς1with themThe word **them** refers to Titus and the previously mentioned brother.
6722CO823mmi2κοινωνὸς ἐμὸς καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός1he is my partner and fellow worker for youAlternate translation: “he is my partner who works with me to help you”
6732CO823lat3ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν1As for our brothersHere, **our brothers** refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus.
6742CO823u8lxfigs-activepassiveἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν1they are sent by the churchesIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the churches have sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6752CO823a8v2figs-abstractnounsδόξα Χριστοῦ1an honor to ChristIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **glory**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “they will cause people to honor Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6762CO9introlt8d0# 2 Corinthians 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
6772CO91wc5l0Connecting Statement:Paul continues on the subject of giving. He wants to make sure that the collection of their offering for the needy believers in Jerusalem takes place before he comes so that it does not seem as though he takes advantage of them. He talks about how giving blesses the giver and glorifies God.
6782CO91fxs3figs-explicitτῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους1the ministry that is for the saintsThis refers to the collection of money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6792CO92rd2gtranslate-namesἈχαΐα1General Information:When Paul refers to **Achaia**, he is talking about a Roman province located in southern Greece where Corinth is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6802CO92i529figs-metonymyἈχαΐα παρεσκεύασται1Achaia has been readyHere the word **Achaia** refers to the people who live in this province, and specifically to the people of the church in Corinth. Alternate translation: “the people of Achaia have been preparing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6812CO93r5ppτοὺς ἀδελφούς1the brothersHere, **the brothers** refers to Titus and the two men who accompany him.
6822CO93k1erμὴ τὸ καύχημα ἡμῶν, τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, κενωθῇ1our boasting about you may not be futilePaul does not want others to think that the things that he had boasted about the Corinthians were false.
6832CO94j8eyεὕρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἀπαρασκευάστους1find you unpreparedAlternate translation: “find you unprepared to give”
6842CO95q1upfigs-goτοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, ἵνα προέλθωσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς1the brothers they they would come to youFrom Pauls perspective, **the brothers** are going. Alternate translation: “the brothers to come to you beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
6852CO95nm2nfigs-activepassiveμὴ ὡς πλεονεξίαν1not as forcedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not as something that we forced you to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6862CO96mm9wfigs-metaphorὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει1the one who sows … will also reap in blessingsPaul uses the image of a farmer sowing seeds to describe the results of giving. As a farmers harvest is based on how much he **sows**, so will Gods **blessings** be little or much based on how generously the Corinthians give. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6872CO97tzt4figs-metonymyκαθὼς προῄρηται τῇ καρδίᾳ1let each one give as he has decided in his heartHere, **heart** refers to the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “just as he has determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6882CO97whg6figs-abstractnounsμὴ ἐκ λύπης ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης1not reluctantly or under compulsionIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **sorrow** and **compulsion**, you can express the same idea with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “not because he feels guilty or because someone is compelling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6892CO97t26dἱλαρὸν γὰρ δότην ἀγαπᾷ ὁ Θεός1for God loves a cheerful giverGod wants people to give gladly to help provide for fellow believers.
6902CO98cz9bfigs-metaphorδυνατεῖ δὲ ὁ Θεὸς, πᾶσαν χάριν περισσεῦσαι εἰς ὑμᾶς1God is able to make all grace overflow for youHere, **grace** is spoken of as if it were a physical object of which a person can have more than he can use. As a person gives financially to other believers, **God** also gives to the giver everything he needs. Alternate translation: “God is able to give you more than you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6912CO98zxz9χάριν1graceHere, **grace** refers to the physical things a Christian needs, not to the need for God to save him from his sins.
6922CO98u8w6περισσεύητε εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν1you may abound in every good workAlternate translation: “so that you may be able to do more and more good deeds”
6932CO99mma1figs-activepassiveκαθὼς γέγραπται1just as it is writtenIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is just as the writer wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6942CO910p3flὁ…ἐπιχορηγῶν1He who suppliesAlternate translation: “God who supplies”
6952CO910b1xefigs-metonymyἄρτον εἰς βρῶσιν1bread for foodHere the word **bread** refers to **food** in general. Alternate translation: “food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6962CO910uts1figs-metaphorχορηγήσει καὶ πληθυνεῖ τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν1will supply and multiply your seed for sowingPaul speaks of the Corinthians possessions as if they are seeds and of giving to others as if they were **sowing** seeds. Alternate translation: “will also supply and multiply your possessions so that you can sow them by giving them to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6972CO910ci67figs-metaphorαὐξήσει τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν1will increase the fruits of your righteousnessPaul compares the benefits that the Corinthians will receive from their generosity to that of a harvest. Alternate translation: “God will bless you even more for your righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6982CO910yv67τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν1the fruits of your righteousnessHere, **righteousness** refers to the righteous actions of the Corinthians in giving their resources to the believers in Jerusalem.
6992CO911eey1figs-activepassiveπλουτιζόμενοι1enriching youIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will enrich you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7002CO911b3e5figs-explicitἥτις κατεργάζεται δι’ ἡμῶν, εὐχαριστίαν τῷ Θεῷ1which produces thanksgiving to God through usThe word **which** refers to the Corinthians generosity. Alternate translation: “Because of your generosity, those who receive the gifts we bring them will thank God” or “and when we give your gifts to those who need them, they will give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7012CO912l7kqfigs-explicitὅτι ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης1For the ministry of this serviceHere, **service** refers to Paul and his companions bringing the contribution to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “For our carrying out this service for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7022CO912esk7figs-metaphorἀλλὰ καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ1but is also overflowing into many acts of thanksgiving to GodPaul speaks of the Corinthian believers act of service as if it were a liquid of which there is more than a container can hold. Alternate translation: “It also causes many deeds for which people will thank God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7032CO913plj4figs-activepassiveδιὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης1Because of the proof of this ministryIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7042CO913ze14δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας1they glorify God for your obedience … the generosity of your sharing with them and with everyonePaul says that the Corinthians will **glorify God** both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need.
7052CO915es8cἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ1for his inexpressible giftThis **gift** could refer to: (1) “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers.
7062CO10introabcd0# 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.<br><br>In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Boasting<br><br>“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a persons sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
7072CO101yc1g0Connecting Statement:Paul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does.
7082CO101gq7jfigs-abstractnounsδιὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ1by the meekness and gentleness of ChristIf your language does not use abstract noun for the ideas behind the word **meekness** and **gentleness**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7092CO102i6hhτοὺς λογιζομένους ἡμᾶς1those who regardAlternate translation: “who think of us”
7102CO102ik1pfigs-metonymyὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας1as walking according to the fleshHere, **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are acting from human motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7112CO103cvd6figs-metaphorἐν σαρκὶ…περιπατοῦντες1we walk in the fleshHere, **walking** is a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “we live our lives in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7122CO103zbetfigs-metonymyἐν σαρκὶ…περιπατοῦντες1Here, **flesh** is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “we live our lives in physical bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7132CO103k7h8figs-metaphorοὐ…στρατευόμεθα1we do not wage warPaul speaks of his trying to persuade the Corinthians to believe him and not the false teachers as if he were fighting a physical **war**. These words should be translated literally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7142CO103gpd3figs-metonymyοὐ κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα1wage war according to the fleshThe word **flesh** is: (1) a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7152CO104uf5sfigs-metaphorτὰ…ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες1the weapons we fight with … for pulling down argumentsPaul speaks of godly wisdom showing human wisdom to be false as if it were a weapon with which he was destroying an enemy stronghold. Alternate translation: “the weapons we fight with … show people that what our enemies say is completely wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7162CO104d1gjfigs-metonymyοὐ σαρκικὰ1are not fleshlyThe word **fleshly** is: (1) a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7172CO105xuz9πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον1every high thing that rises upPaul is still speaking with the metaphor of a war, as if “the knowledge of God” were an army and **every high thing** were a wall that people had made to keep the army out. Alternate translation: “every false argument that proud people think of to protect themselves”
7182CO105b74dπᾶν ὕψωμα1every high thingAlternate translation: “everything that proud people do”
7192CO105vm1afigs-metaphorἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ1rises up against the knowledge of GodPaul speaks of arguments as if they were a wall standing high against an army. The phrase **rises up** mean “stands tall,” not that the “high thing” is floating up into the air. Alternate translation: “people use so they will not have to know who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7202CO105r2yzfigs-metaphorαἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ1We take every thought captive into obedience to ChristPaul speaks of peoples thoughts as if they were enemy soldiers whom he captures in battle. Alternate translation: “we show how all the false ideas those people have are wrong and teach the people to obey Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7212CO106m4dsfigs-metonymyἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν1to avenge every act of disobedienceHere, **act of disobedience** is a metonym for the people who commit those acts. Alternate translation: “punish every one of you who disobey us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7222CO107y2ybfigs-rquestionτὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε1You are looking at the appearance of thingsThis could be: (1) a command. (2) a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7232CO107z1t5τοῦτο λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ1let him remind himselfAlternate translation: “he needs to remember”
7242CO107f3i9καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς1that just as he is Christs, so also are weAlternate translation: “we belong to Christ just as much as he does”
7252CO108d4zufigs-metaphorεἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν1to build you up and not to destroy youPaul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7262CO109nw6eἂν ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς1I would terrify youAlternate translation: “I am trying to frighten you”
7272CO1011m6m6τοῦτο λογιζέσθω ὁ τοιοῦτος1Let such a one consider thisAlternate translation: “I want such people to be aware”
7282CO1011g58zοἷοί ἐσμεν τῷ λόγῳ δι’ ἐπιστολῶν ἀπόντες, τοιοῦτοι καὶ παρόντες τῷ ἔργῳ1what we are in the words of our letters when we are absent is what we will be in our actions when we are thereAlternate translation: “we will do the same things when we are there with you that we have written about in our letters while we have been away from you”
7292CO1011kb55figs-exclusiveἐσμεν1we areHere, **we** refers to Pauls ministry team but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7302CO1012k94zἐνκρῖναι ἢ συνκρῖναι ἑαυτούς, τισιν1to group or compare ourselvesAlternate translation: “to say we are as good as some”
7312CO1012i85yfigs-parallelismαὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς1they measure themselves by one another and compare themselves with each otherBoth of these clauses mean essentially the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
7322CO1012n8sxfigs-metaphorαὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες1they measure themselves by one anotherPaul is speaking of goodness as though it were something whose length people could **measure**. Alternate translation: “they look at each other and try to see who is better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7332CO1012zwl5οὐ συνιᾶσιν1have no understandingAlternate translation: “show everyone that they do not know anything”
7342CO1013x79xfigs-metaphor0General Information:Paul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules, those things over which he has authority as being within the borders or “limits” of his land, and those things not under his authority as being beyond the “limits.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7352CO1013a4udfigs-idiomοὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχησόμεθα1will not boast beyond limitsThis is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will not boast about things over which we have no authority” or “will boast only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7362CO1013u84lκατὰ τὸ μέτρον τοῦ κανόνος, οὗ ἐμέρισεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς1according to the measure of the area that God has assigned to usAlternate translation: “about things under the authority that God has given us to do”
7372CO1013fx2bfigs-metaphorμέτρου, ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν1a measure that reached even as far as youPaul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules. Alternate translation: “and you are within the border of our authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7382CO1014ay6hοὐ…ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς1we are not overextending ourselvesAlternate translation: “we did not go beyond our borders”
7392CO1015hu9lfigs-idiomοὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι1Neither do we boast beyond limits aboutThis is an idiom. See how similar words were translated in [2 Corinthians 10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “And we have not boasted about things over which we have no authority” or “We have not boasted only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7402CO1016raq7ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι1another persons areaAlternate translation: “an area that God has assigned to someone else”
7412CO1017q8ccἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω1boast in the LordAlternate translation: “let … boast about what the Lord has done”
7422CO1018h81tὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων1who commends himselfThis means that he provides enough evidence for each person who hears him to decide whether he is right or wrong. See how “recommend ourselves” is translated in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md).
7432CO1018n5v6figs-activepassiveοὐ…ἐστιν δόκιμος1is approvedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is not whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7442CO1018sy2rfigs-ellipsisὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν1the one whom the Lord commendsYou can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord recommends is the one of whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7452CO11introabce0# 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### False teaching<br><br>The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])<br><br>### Light<br><br>Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Irony<br><br>This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.<br><br>“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.<br><br>The statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.<br><br>“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”<br><br>He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”<br><br>### “Are they servants of Christ?”<br><br>This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](../11/30.md))
7462CO111r4q6ἀνείχεσθέ μου μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης1bear with me in a little bit of foolishnessAlternate translation: “you would allow me allow me to act like a fool”
7472CO112m6vlζηλῶ…ὑμᾶς Θεοῦ ζήλῳ1jealous … jealousyThese words speak of a good, strong desire that the Corinthians be faithful to Christ, and that no one should persuade them to leave him.
7482CO112ee9ifigs-metaphorἡρμοσάμην γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ, παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ1for I promised you in marriage to one husband, to present you as a pure virgin to ChristPaul speaks of his care for the Corinthian believers as if he had **promised** another man that he would prepare his daughter to marry him and he is most concerned that he be able to keep his promise to the man. Alternate translation: “for I was like a father who promised to present his daughter to one husband. I promised to keep you as a pure virgin so I could give you to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7492CO113l2hrφοβοῦμαι δὲ, μή πως ὡς ὁ ὄφις ἐξηπάτησεν Εὕαν ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ, φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν1But I am afraid that somehow … the sincerity and the purity that are in ChristAlternate translation: “But I am afraid that somehow your thoughts might be led astray from a sincere and pure devotion to Christ just as the serpent deceived Eve by his craftiness”
7502CO113m5znfigs-metaphorφθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν1your thoughts might be led astrayPaul speaks of **thoughts** as if they were animals that people could lead along the wrong path. Alternate translation: “someone might cause you to believe lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7512CO114wq57εἰ μὲν γὰρ ὁ ἐρχόμενος1For if one who comesAlternate translation: “When anyone comes and”
7522CO114l7m8πνεῦμα ἕτερον…ὃ οὐκ ἐλάβετε, ἢ εὐαγγέλιον ἕτερον ὃ οὐκ ἐδέξασθε1or you receive a different spirit which you did not receive, or you receive a different gospel which you did not acceptAlternate translation: “a different spirit than the Holy Spirit, or a different gospel than you received from us”
7532CO114fs5zκαλῶς ἀνέχεσθε1you are bearing with it wellSee how these words were translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you are dealing correctly with these things”
7542CO115eet1figs-ironyτῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων1those super-apostlesPaul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say there are. Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
7552CO116f8d1figs-litotesοὐ τῇ γνώσει1I am not untrained in knowledgeThis negative phrase emphasizes the positive truth that he is trained in knowledge. Alternate translation: “I am certainly trained in knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
7562CO116n7xyfigs-abstractnounsοὐ τῇ γνώσει1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **knowledge**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “I am trained to know what they know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7572CO117un9vfigs-rquestionἢ ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε, ὅτι δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν?1Or did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?Paul is beginning to claim that he treated the Corinthians well. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I think we agree that I did not sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7582CO117ax51δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν1freely preached the gospel of God to youAlternate translation: “I preached the gospel of God to you without expecting anything from you in return”
7592CO118k6dsfigs-hyperboleἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα1I robbed other churchesThis is an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul received money from **churches** who were not obligated to give to him. Alternate translation: “I accepted money from other churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7602CO118a416figs-explicitτὴν ὑμῶν διακονίαν1the ministry to youThe full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I could serve you at no cost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7612CO119a23kοἱ ἀδελφοὶ ἐλθόντες1the brothers who cameThese **brothers** were probably all male.
7622CO119fc6lfigs-metaphorἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω1In everything I have kept myself from being a burden to youPaul speaks of someone for whom one has to spend money as if they were heavy items that people have to carry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7632CO119sqcffigs-explicitἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω1The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I have done all I can to make sure you do not have to spend money so that I can be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7642CO119b35rἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν…ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω1I will continue to do thatAlternate translation: “I never will be a burden to you”
7652CO1110si2rἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ1the truth of Christ is in mePaul is emphasizing that because his readers know that he tells the **truth** about **Christ**, they can know that he is telling the truth here. “As surely as you know that I truly know and proclaim the truth about Christ, you could know that what I am about to say is true”
7662CO1110nae3figs-activepassiveἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ1this boasting of mine will not be silencedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make me stop boasting and stay silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7672CO1110ua2iἡ καύχησις αὕτη…εἰς ἐμὲ1this boasting of mineThis refers to what Paul spoke about starting in ([2 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md)).
7682CO1111zqu5figs-rquestionδιὰ τί? ὅτι οὐκ ἀγαπῶ ὑμᾶς?1Why? Because I do not love you?Paul uses rhetorical questions to emphasize love for the Corinthians. These questions can be combined or made into a statement. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could combine them or express them as statements. Alternate translation: “Is it because I do not love you that I do not want to be a burden to you?” or “I will continue to keep you from paying for my needs because this shows others that I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7692CO1111rj6ffigs-ellipsisὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν1God knowsYou can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “God knows I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7702CO1112d9slfigs-metaphorἵνα ἐκκόψω τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται, εὑρεθῶσιν καθὼς καὶ ἡμεῖς1in order that I may take away the opportunityPaul speaks of a false claim that his enemies state as if it were something that he can carry away. Alternate translation: “so that I might make it impossible for those who are trying to get people to regard them as highly as they respect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7712CO1112t4jsfigs-activepassiveεὑρεθῶσιν1they may be regarded as equal to usIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people will think highly of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7722CO1113ml66οἱ γὰρ τοιοῦτοι1For such peopleAlternate translation: “I do what I do because people like them”
7732CO1113nq3tἐργάται δόλιοι1deceitful workersAlternate translation: “dishonest workers”
7742CO1113y896μετασχηματιζόμενοι εἰς ἀποστόλους1disguising themselves as apostlesAlternate translation: “are not apostles, but they try to make themselves look like apostles”
7752CO1114v9z4figs-litotesοὐ θαῦμα1no wonderBy stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should expect this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
7762CO1114ss7sαὐτὸς…ὁ Σατανᾶς μετασχηματίζεται εἰς ἄγγελον φωτός1Satan disguises himself as an angel of lightAlternate translation: “Satan is not an angel of light, but he tries to make himself look like an angel of light”
7772CO1114mld4figs-metaphorἄγγελον φωτός1an angel of lightHere, **light** is a metaphor for righteousness. Alternate translation: “an angel of righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7782CO1115fvx7figs-litotesοὐ μέγα…εἰ1it is no great thingBy stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should certainly expect to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
7792CO1115sb58καὶ οἱ διάκονοι αὐτοῦ μετασχηματίζονται ὡς διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης1his servants also disguise themselves as servants of righteousnessAlternate translation: “his servants are not servants of righteousness, but they try to make themselves look like servants of righteousness”
7802CO1116s962γε κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέξασθέ με, ἵνα κἀγὼ μικρόν τι καυχήσωμαι1receive me as a fool so I may boast a littleAlternate translation: “receive me as you would receive a fool: let me talk, and consider my boasting the words of a fool”
7812CO1118t4icfigs-metonymyκατὰ σάρκα1according to the fleshHere the metonym **flesh** refers to man in his sinful nature and his achievements. Alternate translation: “about their own human achievements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7822CO1119u8f3ἀνέχεσθε τῶν ἀφρόνων1put up with the foolishSee how a similar phrase was translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you … accept me when I act like a fool”
7832CO1119si6lfigs-ironyφρόνιμοι ὄντες1being wisePaul is shaming the Corinthians by using irony. Alternate translation: “thinking that you are wise, even through you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
7842CO1120zmfofigs-hyperboleεἴ τις ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ, εἴ τις κατεσθίει1Paul is using exaggeration when he speaks of some people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves or devouring them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7852CO1120lu7dfigs-metaphorὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ1enslaves youPaul speaks of people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves. Alternate translation: “makes you follow rules they have thought of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7862CO1120sr4nfigs-metaphorκατεσθίει1he consumes youPaul speaks of the super-apostles taking peoples material resources as if they were eating the people themselves. Alternate translation: “takes all your property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7872CO1120yn5tλαμβάνει1takes advantage of youA person **takes advantage of** another person by knowing things that the other person does not and using that knowledge to help himself and harm the other person.
7882CO1121n8s9figs-ironyκατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω ὡς ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν!1I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do thatPaul is using irony to tell the Corinthians that it was not because he was **weak** that he treated them well. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to say that we had the power to harm you, but we treated you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
7892CO1121v8a3ἐν ᾧ…ἄν τις τολμᾷ…τολμῶ κἀγώ1Yet if anyone boasts … I too will boastAlternate translation: “in whatever anyone boasts about … I will dare to boast about it also”
7902CO1122jdq8figs-rquestionἙβραῖοί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. Ἰσραηλεῖταί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ εἰσιν? κἀγώ.1Are they Hebrews? … Are they Israelites? … Are they descendants of Abraham?Paul is asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They want you to think they are important and to believe what they say because they are Hebrews and Israelites and descendants of Abraham. Well, so am I!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7912CO1123a4tzfigs-rquestionδιάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ1Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am morePaul continues asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They say they are servants of Christ—I speak as though I were out of my mind—but I am more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7922CO1123bq23παραφρονῶν λαλῶ1as though I were out of my mindAlternate translation: “I speak as though I were unable to think well”
7932CO1123vy54figs-ellipsisὑπὲρ ἐγώ1I am moreYou can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “I am more a servant of Christ than they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7942CO1123s8wqἐν κόποις περισσοτέρως1in even more hard workAlternate translation: “I have worked harder”
7952CO1123dr6xἐν φυλακαῖς περισσοτέρως1in far more imprisonmentsAlternate translation: “I have been in prisons more often”
7962CO1123cs3ffigs-idiomἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως1in beatings beyond measureHere, **beyond measure** is an idiom that means he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten very many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7972CO1123qdcmfigs-hyperboleἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως1This is exaggerated to emphasize that he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten too many times to bother counting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7982CO1123r6jvἐν θανάτοις πολλάκις1in facing many dangers of deathAlternate translation: “and I have almost died many times”
7992CO1124ttz2τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν1forty lashes minus oneThis was a common expression for being whipped 39 times. In Jewish law the most they were allowed to whip a person at one time was forty lashes. So they commonly whipped a person thirty-nine times so that they would be guilty of whipping someone too many times if the accidentally counted wrong.
8002CO1125u9xcfigs-activepassiveἐραβδίσθην1I was beaten with rodsIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people beat me with wooden rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8012CO1125xk9wfigs-activepassiveἐλιθάσθην1I was stonedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people threw stones at me until they thought I was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8022CO1125b4kzνυχθήμερον ἐν τῷ βυθῷ πεποίηκα1I have spent a night and a day on the open seaPaul was referring to floating in the water after the ship he was on sank.
8032CO1126b3j9figs-explicitκινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις1in danger from false brothersThe full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and in danger from people who claimed to be brothers in Christ, but who betrayed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8042CO1127ds5hfigs-hyperboleγυμνότητι1nakednessHere Paul exaggerates to show his need of clothing. Alternate translation: “without enough clothing to keep me warm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8052CO1128n1q5figs-metaphorἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν1there is the daily pressure on me of my anxietyPaul knows that God will hold him responsible for how well the **churches** obey God and speaks of that knowledge as if it were a heavy object pushing him down. Alternate translation: “I know that God will hold me accountable for the spiritual growth of all the churches, and so I always feel like a heavy object is pushing me down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8062CO1129fvz6figs-rquestionτίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ?1Who is weak, and I am not weak?This rhetorical question emphasizes that Paul cares about people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone is weak, I feel that weakness also.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8072CO1129hhb2figs-metaphorτίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ?1Who is weak, and I am not weak?The word **weak** is probably a metaphor for a spiritual condition, but no one is sure what Paul is speaking of, so it is best to use the same word here. Alternate translation: “I am weak whenever anyone else is weak.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8082CO1129g5amfigs-metaphorτίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι?1Who has been caused to stumble, and I do not burn?Here Pauls anger is spoken of as a burning inside him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8092CO1129bdd4figs-rquestionτίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι?1Paul uses this question to express his anger when a fellow believer is caused to sin. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone causes a brother to sin, I am angry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8102CO1129xu57figs-metaphorσκανδαλίζεται1has been caused to stumblePaul speaks of sin as if it were tripping over something and then falling. Alternate translation: “has been led to sin” or “has thought that God would permit him to sin because of something that someone else did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8112CO1130gxe6τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας1what shows my weaknessesAlternate translation: “what shows how weak I am”
8122CO1131yx8zfigs-litotesοὐ ψεύδομαι1I am not lyingPaul is using litotes to emphasize that he is telling the truth. Alternate translation: “I am telling the absolute truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
8132CO1132n383ὁ ἐθνάρχης Ἁρέτα τοῦ βασιλέως ἐφρούρει τὴν πόλιν1the governor under King Aretas was guarding the cityAlternate translation: “the governor whom King Aretas had appointed had told men to guard the city”
8142CO1132j7deπιάσαι με1to arrest meAlternate translation: “so that they might catch and arrest me”
8152CO1133i8xafigs-activepassiveἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην1I was lowered in a basketIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people put me in a basket and lowered me to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8162CO1133aw7dfigs-metonymyτὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ1from his handsPaul uses the governors **hands** as metonymy for the governor. Alternate translation: “from the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8172CO12introabcf0# 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.<br><br>When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Pauls vision<br><br>Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])<br><br>### Third heaven<br><br>Many scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Sarcasm<br><br>Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](../12/05.md))
8182CO121iwn30Connecting Statement:In defending his apostleship from God, Paul continues to state specific things that have happened to him since he became a believer.
8192CO121iur3ἐλεύσομαι…εἰς1I will go on toAlternate translation: “I will continue talking, but now about”
8202CO121rb42figs-hendiadysὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου1visions and revelations from the LordThis could mean: (1) Paul uses the words **visions** and **revelations** to mean the same thing in hendiadys for emphasis. Alternate translation: “things that the Lord has allowed only me to see” (2) Paul is speaking of two different things. Alternate translation: “secret things that the Lord has let me see with my eyes and other secrets that he has told me about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
8212CO122cz7uοἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ1I know a man in ChristPaul is actually speaking of himself as if he were speaking of someone else, but this should be translated literally if possible.
8222CO122fth2εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα1whether in the body, I do not know, or out of the body, I do not knowPaul continues to describe himself as if this happened to another person. “I do not know if this man was in his physical body or in his spiritual body”
8232CO122k4awτρίτου οὐρανοῦ1the third heavenHere, the **third heaven** refers to the dwelling place of God rather than the sky or outer space (the planets, stars, and the universe).
8242CO124qv5hἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον1was caught up into paradisePaul continues his account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into **paradise**. (2) an angel took this man into **paradise**. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took him up to paradise” or “they took him up to paradise.”
8252CO124wm7yἡρπάγη1caught upHere, **caught up** refers to being suddenly and forcefully held and taken.
8262CO124ic45τὸν Παράδεισον1paradiseHere, **paradise** could refer to: (1) heaven. (2) the third heaven. (3) a special place in heaven.
8272CO125hpq6τοῦ τοιούτου1of such a personAlternate translation: “of that person”
8282CO125i12fοὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις1I will not boast, except about my weaknessesYou can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I will boast only of my weaknesses”
8292CO126p8fmμή τις εἰς ἐμὲ λογίσηται ὑπὲρ ὃ βλέπει με, ἢ ἀκούει ἐξ ἐμοῦ1no one will think more of me than what he sees in me or hears from meAlternate translation: “no one will give me more credit than what he sees in me or hears from me”
8302CO127v5s70General Information:This verse reveals that Paul was speaking about himself beginning in [2 Corinthians 12:2](../12/02.md).
8312CO127xxi2τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων1because of the surpassing greatness of the revelationsAlternate translation: “because those revelations were so much greater than anything anyone else had ever seen”
8322CO127hu8gfigs-activepassiveἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί1a thorn in the flesh was given to meIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave me a thorn in the flesh” or “God allowed me to have a thorn in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8332CO127q5e7figs-metaphorσκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί1a thorn in the fleshHere Pauls physical problems are compared to a **thorn** piercing his **flesh**. Alternate translation: “an affliction” or “a physical problem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8342CO127q7lzἄγγελος Σατανᾶ1a messenger from SatanAlternate translation: “a servant of Satan”
8352CO127ehp9μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι2overly proudAlternate translation: “I would not become too proud”
8362CO128n76pτρὶς1Three timesPaul put the words **three times** at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that he had prayed many times about his “thorn” ([2 Corinthians 12:7](../12/07.md)).
8372CO128wc7rὑπὲρ τούτου1Lord about thisAlternate translation: “about this thorn in the flesh,” or “about this affliction”
8382CO129nr2jἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου1My grace is enough for youAlternate translation: “I will be kind to you, and that is all you need”
8392CO129cs63ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται1for power is made perfect in weaknessAlternate translation: “for my power works best when you are weak”
8402CO129g8mifigs-metaphorἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ1the power of Christ might reside on mePaul speaks of the **power of Christ** as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ. (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8412CO1210pxf1εὐδοκῶ ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ1I am content for Christs sake in weaknesses, in insults, in troubles, in persecutions and distressing situationsThis could mean: (1) Paul is **content** in **weaknesses**, **insults**, **troubles**, **persecutions**, and **distressing situations** if these things come because I belong to Christ. (2) Paul is content in weakness if these things cause more people to know Christ.
8422CO1210s5sxἐν ἀσθενείαις1in weaknessesAlternate translation: “when I am weak”
8432CO1210xl8qἐν ὕβρεσιν1in insultsAlternate translation: “when people try to make me angry by saying that I am a bad person”
8442CO1210hza1ἐν ἀνάγκαις1in troublesAlternate translation: “when I am suffering”
8452CO1210c4t2στενοχωρίαις1distressing situationsAlternate translation: “when there is trouble”
8462CO1210t7qgὅταν γὰρ ἀσθενῶ, τότε δυνατός εἰμι1For whenever I am weak, then I am strongPaul is saying that when he is no longer **strong** enough to do what needs to be done, Christ, who is more powerful than Paul could ever be, will work through Paul to do what needs to be done. However, it would be best to translate these words literally, if your language allows.
8472CO1211a1ymγέγονα ἄφρων1I have become a foolAlternate translation: “I am acting like a fool”
8482CO1211pzw1ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε1You forced me to thisAlternate translation: “You forced me to talk this way”
8492CO1211v2lrfigs-activepassiveἐγὼ…ὤφειλον ὑφ’ ὑμῶν συνίστασθαι1I should have been commended by youIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you should have praised me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8502CO1211f644συνίστασθαι1commendedSee how you translated similar phrases in ([3:1](../03/01.md)) and ([4:2](../04/02.md)). Alternate translation: “been praised” or “been recommended”
8512CO1211h4d5figs-litotesοὐδὲν γὰρ ὑστέρησα1For I was not at all inferiorBy using the negative form, Paul is saying strongly that those Corinthians who think that he is **inferior** are wrong. Alternate translation: “For I am just as good as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
8522CO1211s82xfigs-ironyτῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων1super-apostlesPaul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say they are. See how this is translated in [2 Corinthians 11:5](../11/05.md). Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
8532CO1212kp5lfigs-activepassiveτὰ μὲν σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου κατειργάσθη1indeed the signs of an apostle were performedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form with emphasis on the **signs**, or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is the true signs of an apostle that I performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8542CO1212d4umσημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν1signs and wonders and mighty deedsThese are the “signs of an apostle” that Paul performed “with all perseverance.”
8552CO1213z35efigs-rquestionτί γάρ ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν?1how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that … you?Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians are wrong to accuse him of wanting to do them harm. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I treated you the same way I treated all the other churches, except that I myself did not burden you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8562CO1213d426αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν1I was not a burden to youAlternate translation: “I did not ask you for money or other things I needed”
8572CO1213sy7vfigs-ironyχαρίσασθέ μοι τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην!1Forgive me for this wrong!Paul is being ironic to shame the Corinthians. Both he and they know that he has done them no wrong, but they have been treating him as though he has wronged them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
8582CO1213u1w9τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην1this wrongHere, **this wrong** refers to not asking them for money and other things he needed.
8592CO1214ugk1figs-explicitἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς1but youThe full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “but what I want is that you love and accept me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8602CO1214wd97οὐ…ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν3children should not save up for the parentsYoung **children** are not responsible for saving money or other goods to give to their healthy **parents**.
8612CO1215vj2mfigs-metaphorἐγὼ…ἥδιστα δαπανήσω καὶ ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι1I will most gladly spend and be spentPaul speaks of his work and his physical life as if it were money that he or God could **spend**. Alternate translation: “I will gladly do any work and gladly allow God to permit people to kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8622CO1215nk8vfigs-metonymyὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν1for your soulsThe word **souls** is a metonym for the people themselves. Alternate translation: “for you” or “so you will live well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8632CO1215t3nafigs-rquestionεἰ περισσοτέρως ὑμᾶς ἀγαπῶν, ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι?1If I love you more, am I to be loved less?This rhetorical question to emphasize that the Corinthians should love Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “If I love you so much, you should not love me so little.” or “If I love you so much, you should love me more than you do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8642CO1215j887περισσοτέρως1moreIt is not clear what it is that Pauls love is **more** than. It is probably best to use “very much” or a “so much” that can be compared to “so little” later in the sentence.
8652CO1216ur5xfigs-ironyἀλλὰ ὑπάρχων πανοῦργος δόλῳ, ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον1But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceitPaul uses irony to shame the Corinthians who think he lied to them even if he did not ask them for money. Alternate translation: “but others think I was deceptive and used trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
8662CO1217vb7qfigs-rquestionμή τινα ὧν ἀπέσταλκα πρὸς ὑμᾶς, δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐπλεονέκτησα ὑμᾶς?1I did not take advantage of you by any of those whom I sent to you, did I?Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one that I sent to you has taken advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8672CO1218pjl2figs-rquestionμήτι ἐπλεονέκτησεν ὑμᾶς Τίτος?1Titus did not take advantage of you, did he?Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Titus certainly did not take advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8682CO1218acg6figs-metaphorοὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν1Did we not walk in the same way?Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same spirit.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8692CO1218rjiyfigs-rquestionοὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν1Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all have the same attitude and live alike.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8702CO1218k6b3figs-rquestionοὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν?1Did we not walk in the same steps?Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same steps.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8712CO1218oketfigs-metaphorοὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν?1Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all do things the same way.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8722CO1219g1iwfigs-rquestionπάλαι δοκεῖτε ὅτι ὑμῖν ἀπολογούμεθα?1Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?Paul uses this question to acknowledge something that the people may have been thinking. He does this so that he can assure them that it is not true. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Perhaps you think that all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8732CO1219ih3efigs-metaphorκατέναντι Θεοῦ1Before GodPaul speaks of **God** knowing everything Paul does as if God were physically present and observed everything Paul said and did. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “In the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8742CO1219vg3ufigs-metaphorὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς1for your strengtheningPaul speaks of knowing how to obey God and desiring to obey him as if it were physical growth. Alternate translation: “so that you would know God and obey him better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8752CO1220cu6sοὐχ οἵους θέλω, εὕρω ὑμᾶς1I may not find you as I wishAlternate translation: “I may not like what I find” or “I may not like what I see you doing”
8762CO1220zy6gκἀγὼ εὑρεθῶ ὑμῖν οἷον οὐ θέλετε1I may not be found by you as you wishAlternate translation: “you might not like what you see in me”
8772CO1220rh1hfigs-abstractnounsμή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι1there may be quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorderIf your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. This could mean: (1) some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each others private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8782CO1221ddw3πενθήσω πολλοὺς τῶν προημαρτηκότων,1I might be grieved by many of those who have sinnedAlternate translation: “I will be grieved because many of them have not given up their old sins”
8792CO1221hq1efigs-parallelismμὴ μετανοησάντων ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ1did not repent of the impurity and sexual immorality and lustful indulgenceThis could mean: (1) Paul is saying almost the same thing three times for emphasis. Alternate translation: “did not stop commiting the sexual sins that they practiced” (2) Paul is speaking of three different sins. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
8802CO1221rh22figs-abstractnounsἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ1of the impurityIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **impurity**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8812CO1221rn6ufigs-abstractnounsπορνείᾳ1of the … sexual immoralityIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **sexual immorality**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of doing sexually immoral deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8822CO1221yyr5figs-abstractnounsἀσελγείᾳ1of the … lustful indulgenceIf your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **lustful indulgence**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “doing things that satisfy immoral sexual desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8832CO13introabcg0# 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Preparation<br><br>Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.<br><br>### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”<br><br>Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
8842CO131slj1figs-activepassiveἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα1Every matter must be established by the evidence of two or three witnessesIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Believe that someone has done something wrong only after two or three people have said the same thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8852CO132fxl6τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν1all the restAlternate translation: “all you other people”
8862CO134a1bffigs-activepassiveκαὶ…ἐσταυρώθη1he was crucifiedIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8872CO135sbx4ἐν ὑμῖν1in youHere, **in you** could mean: (1) Jesus is living inside each individual. (2) Jesus is living among them, part of and the most important member of the group.
8882CO137u75efigs-doublenegativesμὴ ποιῆσαι ὑμᾶς κακὸν μηδέν1that you may not do any wrongIf your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … wrong**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “you will do everything right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
8892CO137gt2eδόκιμοι1to have passed the testAlternate translation: “to be great teachers and live the truth”
8902CO138a3l7οὐ…δυνάμεθά τι κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας1we are not able to do anything against the truthAlternate translation: “we are not able to keep people from learning the truth”
8912CO139vt7bτὴν ὑμῶν κατάρτισιν1for your perfectionAlternate translation: “that you may become spiritually mature”
8922CO1310rlm8figs-metaphorεἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν.1for building up, and not for tearing downPaul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2 Corinthians 10:8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8932CO1311uk1p0Connecting Statement:Paul closes his letter to the Corinthian believers.
8942CO1311fm8mκαταρτίζεσθε1Be restoredAlternate translation: “Work toward maturity”
8952CO1311diw1τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖτε1be of the same mindAlternate translation: “live in harmony with one another”
8962CO1312p1nhἐν ἁγίῳ φιλήματι1with a holy kissAlternate translation: “with Christian love”
8972CO1312x2qdοἱ ἅγιοι1the saintsAlternate translation: “those whom God has set apart for himself”